1 Paul, called by Christ Jesus to be an apostle by the will of God, and Sosthenes our brother,
2 to the church of God at Corinth, those who have been sanctified in Christ Jesus and called to be holy people, together with all those in every place who call on the name of our Lord Jesus Christ, who is their Lord and ours.
3 May grace and peace be to you from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ.
4 I always give thanks to my God for you because of the grace of God that Christ Jesus gave to you. 5 He has made you rich in every way, in all speech and with all knowledge, 6 just as the testimony about Christ has been confirmed as true among you. 7 Therefore you lack no spiritual gift as you eagerly wait for the revelation of our Lord Jesus Christ. 8 He will also strengthen you to the end, so that you will be blameless on the day of our Lord Jesus Christ. 9 God is faithful, who called you into the fellowship of his Son, Jesus Christ our Lord.
10 Now I urge you, brothers, through the name of our Lord Jesus Christ, that you all agree, and that there be no divisions among you. I urge that you be joined together with the same mind and by the same purpose. 11 For I have been informed concerning you, my brothers, by Chloe's people that there are factions among you. 12 I mean this: Each one of you says, "I am with Paul," or "I am with Apollos," or "I am with Cephas," or "I am with Christ." 13 Is Christ divided? Was Paul crucified for you? Were you baptized into the name of Paul? 14 I thank God that I baptized none of you, except Crispus and Gaius. 15 This was so that no one would say that you were baptized into my name. 16 (I also baptized the household of Stephanas. Beyond that, I do not know if I baptized any others.) 17 For Christ did not send me to baptize but to preach the gospel—not with clever speech, in order that the cross of Christ would not be emptied of its power.
18 For the message about the cross is foolishness to those who are perishing. But among those who are being saved, it is the power of God. 19 For it is written,
"I will destroy the wisdom of the wise.
I will set aside the understanding of the intelligent."
20 Where is the wise person? Where is the scholar? Where is the debater of this world? Has not God turned the wisdom of the world into foolishness? 21 Since the world in its wisdom did not know God, God was pleased to save those who believe through the foolishness of preaching. 22 For Jews ask for miraculous signs and Greeks seek wisdom. 23 But we preach Christ crucified, a stumbling block to Jews and foolishness to Gentiles. 24 But to those whom God has called, both Jews and Greeks, we preach Christ as the power and the wisdom of God. 25 For the foolishness of God is wiser than people, and the weakness of God is stronger than people.
26 Look at your calling, brothers. Not many of you were wise according to the flesh. Not many of you were powerful. Not many of you were of noble birth. 27 But God chose the foolish things of the world to shame the wise. God chose what is weak in the world to shame what is strong. 28 God chose what is low and despised in the world. He even chose things that are regarded as nothing, to bring to nothing things that are held as valuable. 29 He did this so that no flesh would have a reason to boast before him. 30 Because of what God did, now you are in Christ Jesus, who became for us wisdom from God. He became our righteousness, holiness, and redemption. 31 As a result, as it is written, "Let the one who boasts, boast in the Lord."
The first three verses are a greeting. In the ancient Near East, this was a common way of starting a letter.
Some translations set poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to show that it is poetry. The ULB does this with the poetry in verse 19, which is from the Old Testament.
In this chapter, Paul scolds the church for being divided and for following different apostles. (See: apostle)
Spiritual gifts are specific supernatural abilities to help the church. The Holy Spirit gives these gifts to Christians after they come to believe in Jesus. Paul lists spiritual gifts in Chapter 12. Some scholars believe the Holy Spirit gave some of these gifts only in the early church to help establish the developing church. Other scholars believe all the gifts of the Spirit are still available to help all Christians throughout the church history. (See: faith)
In this chapter, Paul refers to the return of Christ using two different phrases: "the revelation of our Lord Jesus Christ" and "the day of our Lord Jesus Christ."
Paul uses rhetorical questions to scold the Corinthians for dividing into factions and for relying on human wisdom.
A stumbling block is a rock people stumble over. Here it represents the difficulty Jews have in believing that God allowed his Messiah to be crucified.
Your language may have a particular way of introducing the author of a letter. Alternate translation: "I, Paul"
This indicates that both Paul and the Corinthians knew Sosthenes. Alternate translation: "Sosthenes, the brother you and I know"
Your language may have a particular way of introducing the intended audience. Alternate translation: "am writing this letter to you in Corinth who believe in God"
Here "sanctified" refers to people who have been set apart as God's people. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "to those whom Christ Jesus has set apart for God" or "to those whom God has set apart for himself because they belong to Christ Jesus"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "whom God has called to be holy people"
Possible meanings are 1) this phrase tells who else is called to be holy, or 2) this phrase tells who else this letter is written to.
The word "name" here is a metonym for person of Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: "who call on the Lord Jesus Christ"
The word "ours" includes Paul's audience. Jesus is the Lord of Paul and the Corinthians and all the churches.
Paul and Sosthenes wrote this letter to the Christians who belonged to the church in Corinth. Unless otherwise noted, such words as "you" and "your" refer to Paul's audience and so are plural.
Paul describes the believers' position and fellowship in Christ as they wait for his coming.
Paul speaks of grace as though it were a physical object that Jesus gives Christians as a gift. Alternate translation: "because Christ Jesus has made it possible for God to be kind to you"
Possible meanings are 1) "Christ has made you rich" or 2) "God has made you rich."
Paul is speaking in general terms. Alternate translation: "made you rich with all kinds of spiritual blessings"
God has enabled you to tell others about God's message in many ways.
God has enabled you to understand God's message in many ways.
Possible meanings are 1) "you saw for yourselves that what we had said about Christ was true" or 2) "other people learned from seeing how you now live that what we and you say about Christ is true."
"Because what I have just said is true,"
This can be stated in positive form. Alternate translation: "you have every spiritual gift"
Possible meanings are 1) "the time when God will reveal the Lord Jesus Christ" or 2) "the time when our Lord Jesus Christ will reveal himself."
There will be no reason for God to condemn you.
"God, who called ... our Lord, will do everything he has said he will do"
This is an important title for Jesus, the Son of God.
Paul reminds the Corinthian believers that they are to live in unity with each other and that the message of the cross of Christ, not baptism by people, is what saves.
Here this means fellow Christians, including both men and women.
"Name" here is a metonym for the person of Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: "by means of our Lord Jesus Christ"
"that you live in harmony with one another"
"that you do not divide into separate groups among yourselves"
"live in unity, agree with other, and work together to accomplish the same things"
This refers to family members, servants, and others who are part of the household of which Chloe, a woman, is the head.
"you are in groups that quarrel one with another"
Paul is expressing a general attitude of division.
Paul used a question to emphasize that there is only Christ, so it does not make sense for Christians to be divided among themselves. Alternate translation: "Christ is certainly not divided!" or "There is only one Christ!"
Paul used a question to emphasize that it was Christ, not Paul or Apollos, who was crucified. This can also be translated in active form. Alternate translation: "It certainly was not Paul whom they put to death on the cross for your salvation!"
Paul used a question to emphasize that we all are baptized into the name of Christ. This can also be translated in active form. Alternate translation: "It was not into the name of Paul that people baptized you!"
"In the name of" here is a metonym for "by the authority of." Alternate translation: "by Paul's authority"
"among you I baptized only"
He was a synagogue ruler who became a Christian.
He traveled with the Apostle Paul.
Here "name" represents "authority." This means Paul did not baptize others because they may claim that they became Paul's disciples. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "For some of you might have claimed that I baptized you to make you my disciples"
This refers to the family members and slaves in the house where Stephanas, a man, was the head.
This means that baptism was not the primary goal of Paul's ministry.
The phrase "in order ... would not" can be stated in positive form, and "be emptied" can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "not with clever speech, because clever speech would empty the cross of its power" or "not with clever speech, because this would cause the cross of Christ to lose its power"
Paul speaks of God's power to save people who trust in Christ as if the cross on which Christ died had power. The cross being emptied of its power represents people not recognizing God's power to save them through Christ's death. If Paul were to use clever speech, people might pay more attention to his clever speech than to Christ's death. Alternate translation: "in order that people might recognize God's power to save them through Jesus's death on the cross" or "because clever speech would distract people from God's power as shown in the cross"
Paul emphasizes God's wisdom rather than man's wisdom.
"the preaching about the crucifixion" or "the message of Christ's dying on the cross"
"is senseless" or "is silly"
"dying." This refers to dying in rebellion against God.
"it is God working powerfully in us"
"I will confuse intelligent people" or "I will make the plans that intelligent people make completely fail"
Paul emphasizes that truly wise people are nowhere to be found. Alternate translation: "Compared with the wisdom of the gospel, there are no wise people, no scholars, no debaters!"
a person who is recognized as someone who has studied a great deal
a person who argues about what he knows or who is skilled in such arguments
Paul uses this question to emphasize what God has done to the wisdom of this world. Alternate translation: "God has shown that everything they call wisdom is really foolishness"
Possible meanings are 1) "all who believe the message" or 2) "all who believe in Christ."
This page has intentionally been left blank.
Here the word "we" refers to Paul and other Bible teachers.
"about Christ, who died on a cross"
Just as a person can stumble over a block on a road, so the message of salvation through the crucifixion of the Christ keeps Jews from believing in Jesus. Alternate translation: "not acceptable" or "very offensive"
"to the people God calls"
"we teach about Christ" or "we tell all people about Christ"
Possible meanings are 1) "we preach that God acted powerfully and wisely by sending Christ to die for us" or "we preach that through Christ God has shown how strong and wise he is."
Another possible meaning is that Christ is powerful and it is through Christ that God saves us.
Another possible meaning is that God shows the content of his wisdom through Christ.
Possible meanings are 1) Paul is speaking ironically about God's foolishness and weakness. Paul knows God is not foolish or weak. Alternate translation: "what seems to be the foolishness of God is wiser than people's wisdom, and what seems to be the weakness of God is stronger than the people's strength" or 2) Paul is speaking from the point of view of the Greek people who may think God is foolish or weak. Alternate translation: "what people call God's foolishness is really wiser than what people call wisdom, and what people call God's weakness is really stronger than people's strength"
Paul emphasizes the believer's position before God.
This can be stated in positive form. Alternate translation: "Very few of you"
"wise according to human standards" or "what most people would call wise"
"special because your family is important"
Paul repeats many of the same words in two sentences that mean almost the same thing to emphasize the difference between God's way of doing things and how people think God should do them.
"God chose to use the things that the world thinks are foolish to shame those whom the world thinks are wise"
"God chose to use things that the world thinks are weak to shame the things that the world thinks are strong"
"the things that are humble and hated"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "that which people usually regard as without value"
"nothing. He did this so he could show that the things that are held as valuable are really worthless"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "things that people think are worth money" or "things that people think are worth respect"
"God did this"
The word "flesh" here is a metonym for people, who are made of flesh. Alternate translation: "no people"
This refers to the work of Christ on the cross.
These words refer to Paul, those with him, and the Corinthians.
Possible meanings are 1) "Christ Jesus, who has made clear to us how wise God is" or 2) "Christ Jesus, who has given us God's wisdom."
"If a person boasts, he should boast about how great the Lord is"
1 When I came to you, brothers, I did not come with eloquence of speech or wisdom as I proclaimed hidden truths about God. [1]2 For I decided to know nothing when I was among you except Jesus Christ, and him crucified. 3 And I was with you in weakness and in fear and in much trembling. 4 And my message and my proclamation were not with persuasive words of wisdom, but with the demonstration of the Spirit and of power, 5 so that your faith might not be in the wisdom of humans, but in the power of God.
6 Now we do speak wisdom among the mature, but not the wisdom of this world, or of the rulers of this age, who are passing away. 7 Instead, we speak God's wisdom in hidden truth, the hidden wisdom that God predestined before the ages for our glory. 8 None of the rulers of this age understood it, for if they had understood it, they would not have crucified the Lord of glory. 9 But as it is written,
"No eye has seen,
no ear has heard,
no human heart has imagined
what God has prepared for those who love him"—
10 For God has revealed these things to us through the Spirit. For the Spirit searches everything out, even the deep things of God. [2]11 For who knows a person's thoughts except the spirit of the person in him? So also, no one knows the deep things of God except the Spirit of God. 12 But we did not receive the spirit of the world but the Spirit who is from God, so that we might know the things freely given to us by God. 13 We speak about these things in words not taught by human wisdom but by the Spirit, interpreting spiritual things to spiritual people. 14 The unspiritual person does not receive the things that belong to the Spirit of God, for they are foolishness to him. He cannot understand them because they are spiritually discerned. 15 The one who is spiritual judges all things, but he is not judged by others.
16 "For who can know the mind of the Lord,
that he can instruct him?"
But we have the mind of Christ.
Some translations set poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to show that it is poetry. The ULB does this with the poetry in verses 9 and 16. These poetic lines are from the Old Testament.
Paul continues the discussion from the first chapter that contrasts human wisdom and God's wisdom. For Paul, human wisdom can be foolish. He says the wisdom from the Holy Spirit is the only true wisdom. Paul uses the phrase "hidden wisdom" when he refers to previously unknown truths. (See: wise and foolish)
Paul contrasts human wisdom and God's wisdom. He emphasizes that spiritual wisdom comes from God.
Here this means fellow Christians, including both men and women.
When Paul said that he "decided to know nothing" he exaggerated to emphasize that he decided to focus on and teach about nothing other than Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: "I decided to teach nothing ... except Jesus Christ" or "I decided not to teach anything ... except Jesus Christ"
The double negative here emphasizes that Jesus Christ was the only thing Paul wanted to think about. Alternate translation: "when I was among you to know only Jesus Christ"
"I was visiting with you"
Possible meanings are: 1) "physically weak" or 2) "feeling like I could not do what I needed to do."
The ideas in the nouns "message" and "proclamation" can be expressed with the verbs "speak" and "preach." Alternate translation: "I did not speak and preach with persuasive words of wisdom"
These are words that sound wise and with which the speaker hopes to cause people to do or believe something. Alternate translation: "wise and pursuasive words"
"so that you will not trust in human wisdom"
"but your faith will be in the power of God" or "but you will trust in the power of God"
Paul interrupts his main argument to explain what he means by "wisdom" and to whom he desires to speak.
The word "Now" is used here to mark a break in the main teaching. Paul begins to explain that true wisdom is God's wisdom.
The abstract noun "wisdom" can be stated as the adjective "wise." Alternate translation: "speak wise words" or "speak a wise message"
"mature believers"
"before God created anything"
"in order to ensure our future glory"
"Jesus, the glorious Lord"
This is a triplet referring to all parts of a person to emphasize that no man has ever been aware of the things that God has prepared.
The Lord has created in heaven wonderful surprises for those who love him.
the truths about Jesus and his death on the cross
"the Spirit studies everthing accurately" or "the Spirit investigates everything." This implies that the Spirit knows everything.
Paul uses this question to emphasize that no one knows what a person is thinking except the person himself. Alternate translation: "No one knows what a person is thinking except that person's spirit"
This refers to a person's inner being, his own spiritual nature.
"only the Spirit of God knows the deep things of God"
Here the word "we" includes both Paul and his audience.
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "that God freely gave to us" or "that God has kindly given us"
The meaning of the original language here is uncertain. Other translations of the Bible translate this as "interpreting spiritual things with spiritual words."
Here "spiritual people" refers to those who are led by the Holy Spirit to obey God.
Here the word "we" includes both Paul and his audience.
the non-Christian person, who has not received the Holy Spirit
"because understanding these things requires the aid of the Spirit"
"The believer who has received the Spirit"
This can be translated in active form. Alternate translation: "others cannot judge him" or "no one can judge him"
Paul uses this question to emphasize that no one knows the mind of the Lord. No one is as wise as the Lord. Alternate translation: "No one can know the mind of the Lord, so no one can teach him anything he does not already know"
1 And I, brothers, could not speak to you as spiritual people, but instead as to fleshly people, as to little children in Christ. 2 I fed you milk, not solid food, for you were not ready for it; and even now you are not yet ready. 3 For you are still fleshly. For where jealousy and strife exist among you, are you not living according to the flesh, and are you not walking by human standards? 4 For when one says, "I follow Paul," and another says, "I follow Apollos," are you not merely human beings? 5 Who then is Apollos? Who is Paul? Servants through whom you believed, just as the Lord gave tasks to each. 6 I planted and Apollos watered, but God gave the growth. 7 So then, neither he who plants nor he who waters is anything. But it is God who gives the growth. 8 Now he who plants and he who waters are one, and each will receive his own wages according to his own labor. 9 For we are God's fellow workers. You are God's garden, God's building.
10 According to the grace of God that was given to me as a skilled master builder, I laid a foundation and another is building on it. But let each man be careful how he builds on it. 11 For no one can lay a foundation other than the one that has been laid, that is, Jesus Christ. 12 Now if anyone builds on the foundation with gold, silver, precious stones, wood, hay, or straw, 13 his work will be revealed, for the day will reveal it. For it will be revealed in fire. The fire will test the quality of what each one has done. 14 If anyone's work remains, he will receive a reward; 15 but if anyone's work is burned up, he will suffer loss, but he himself will be saved, as though escaping through fire.
16 Do you not know that you are God's temple and that the Spirit of God lives in you? 17 If anyone destroys God's temple, God will destroy that person. For God's temple is holy, and so are you.
18 Let no one deceive himself. If anyone among you thinks he is wise in this age, let him become a "fool" that he may become wise. 19 For the wisdom of this world is foolishness with God. For it is written,
"He catches the wise in their craftiness."
20 And again,
"The Lord knows that the reasoning of the wise is futile."
21 For this reason, let no one boast in men. All things are yours, 22 whether Paul, or Apollos, or Cephas, or the world, or life, or death, or things present, or things to come. All things are yours, 23 and you are Christ's, and Christ is God's.
Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page to make them easier to read. The ULB does this with the quoted words of verses 19 and 20.
The Corinthian believers were immature because of their unrighteous actions. He calls them "fleshly," meaning acting as nonbelievers. This term is used in opposition to those who are "spiritual." Christians following their "flesh" are acting foolishly. They are following the wisdom of the world. (See: righteous, flesh, spirit and foolish and wise)
There are many metaphors in this chapter. Paul uses "little children" and "milk" to illustrate spiritual immaturity. He uses the metaphors of planting and watering to describe the roles he and Apollos played in growing the church in Corinth. Paul uses other metaphors to help teach spiritual truths to the Corinthians and to help them to understand his teachings.
Here this means fellow Christians, including both men and women.
people who obey the Spirit
people who follow their own desires
The Corinthians are compared to children very young in age and understanding. Alternate translation: "as to very young believers in Christ"
Babies can only drink milk because they have not grown enough to eat solid food. Paul uses this image as a metaphor to mean that the Corinthians can only understand easy truths. They are not mature enough to understand greater truths.
It is implied that they are not ready to understand more difficult teachings. Alternate translation: "you still are not ready to understand the harder teachings about following Christ"
still behaving according to sinful or worldly desires
Paul uses questions to rebuke the Corinthians for their sinful behavior. Here "walking" is a metaphor for how a person lives or behaves. Alternate translation: "you should be ashamed because you are behaving according to your sinful desires and you are living according to human standards!"
Paul uses a question to rebuke the Corinthians. Alternate translation: "you should be ashamed because you are living the same way that people who do not have the Spirit live."
Paul is emphasizing that he and Apollos are not the original source of the gospel, and therefore the Corinthians should not follow them. Alternate translation: "It is wrong to form groups to follow Apollos or Paul!" or
Paul is speaking of himself as though he were speaking of someone else. Alternate translation: "I am not important!" or "Who am I?"
Paul answers his own question by saying that he and Apollos are God's servants. Alternate translation: "Paul and Apollos are servants of Christ, and you believed in Christ because we served him"
This can be stated with the understood information. Alternate translation: "We are servants through whom you believed, and to each of us the Lord gave different tasks"
The knowledge of God is compared to a seed which must be planted in order to grow. Alternate translation: "When I preached God's word to you, I was like one who plants seeds in a garden"
As seeds need water, faith needs further teaching in order for it to grow. Alternate translation: "and when Apollos continued to teach you God's word, he was like one who waters a garden"
As plants grow and develop, so faith and knowledge in God also grow and become deeper and stronger. Alternate translation: "but God caused you to grow" or "but just as God causes plants to grow, he caused you to grow spiritually"
Paul stresses that neither he nor Apollos is responsible for the believers' spiritual growth, but it is God's doing.
Here to give growth means to cause growth. The abstract noun "growth" can be translated with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: "it is God who causes you to grow"
Paul speaks of telling people the good news and teaching those who have accepted it as if they were planting and watering plants.
Possible meanings are "one" are 1) "united in purpose" or 2) "equal in importance."
an amount of money that a worker receives for his work
This refers to Paul and Apollos but not the Corinthian church.
Paul considers himself and Apollos as working together.
Possible meanings are 1) being God's garden represents belonging to God. Alternate translation: "You are like a garden that belongs to God" or 2) being God's garden represents God causing us to grow. Alternate translation: "You are like a garden that God makes grow"
Possible meanings are 1) being God's building represents belonging to God. Alternate translation: "and you are like a building that belongs to God" or 2) being God's building represents God causing us to become what he wants. Alternate translation: "and you are like a building that God is constructing"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "According to the task that God freely gave me to do"
Paul equates his teaching of faith and salvation in Jesus Christ to laying a foundation for a building.
Paul is referring to the person or people who are teaching the Corinthians at that time as if they are carpenters who are constructing the building above the foundation.
This refers to God's workers in general. Alternate translation: "let each person who serves God"
Paul continues his metaphor about a foundation.
The phrase "has been laid" can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "no one can lay a foundation other than the one and only foundation"
Paul speaks of what builders usually do when constructing a building to describe what the teachers in Corinth are actually doing. Builders usually only use gold, silver, or precious stones as decorations on buildings.
The building materials used to build a new building are being compared to the spiritual values used to build a person's behavior and activities during his lifetime. Alternate translation: "Whether a person builds with valuable materials that will last or with cheap materials that burn easily"
"expensive stones"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "God will show everyone what the builder has done"
The "day" refers to the time when God will judge everyone. When God shows everyone what these teachers have done, it will be like the sun has come up to reveal what happened during the night.
Just as fire will reveal the strengths or destroy the weaknesses of a building, God's fire will judge man's efforts and activities. Alternate translation: "God will use fire to show the quality of his work"
"work lasts" or "work survives"
This is a metaphor for a person's work being shown to have no value. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "if the fire destroys anyone's work" or "if the judgement shows that a person's work has no value"
The abstract noun "loss" can be expressed with the verb "lose." Alternate translation: "he will lose his reward"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "but God will save him as though through fire"
This is a simile showing the danger that such a person is in if his works have no value. (See:
Paul uses a question to rebuke the Corinthians. Alternate translation: "You act as though you do not know that you are God's temple and the Spirit of God lives in you!"
All instances of "you" in this verse are plural.
This page has intentionally been left blank.
Nobody should believe the lie that he himself is wise in this world.
according to the way people who do not believe decide what is wise
"that person should be willing to have people who do not believe call him a fool"
God traps the people who think they are clever and uses their own schemes to trap them.
"The Lord knows that what people who think they are wise plan to do is futile"
useless
This page has intentionally been left blank.
This page has intentionally been left blank.
"you belong to Christ, and Christ belongs to God"
1 This is how a person should regard us, as servants of Christ and stewards of the hidden truths of God. 2 Now what is required of stewards is that they are found to be trustworthy. 3 But for me it is a very small thing that I should be judged by you or by any human court. For I do not even judge myself. 4 I am not aware of any charge being made against me, but that does not justify me. The one who judges me is the Lord. 5 Therefore do not pronounce judgment about anything before the time, before the Lord comes. He will bring to light the hidden things of darkness and reveal the purposes of the heart. Then each one will receive his praise from God.
6 Now, brothers, I applied these principles to myself and Apollos for your sakes, so that from us you might learn the meaning of the saying,
"Do not go beyond what is written."
This is so that none of you may be puffed up in favor of one against the other. 7 For who sees any difference between you and others? What do you have that you did not receive? If you have received it, why do you boast as if you did not receive it? 8 Already you have all you could want! Already you have become rich! You began to reign—and that quite apart from us! Indeed, I wish you did reign, so that we could reign with you. 9 For I think God has put us apostles on display as the last in line, in a procession and like men sentenced to death. We have become a spectacle to the world—to angels, and to human beings. 10 We are fools for Christ's sake, but you are wise in Christ. We are weak, but you are strong. You are held in honor, but we are held in dishonor. 11 Up to this present hour we are hungry and thirsty, we are poorly clothed, we are beaten, and we are homeless. 12 We labor hard, working with our own hands. When we are slandered, we bless. When we are persecuted, we endure. 13 When we are slandered, we speak with kindness. We have become as the refuse of the world and the filthiest of all things, even till now.
14 I do not write these things to shame you, but to warn you as my beloved children. 15 For even if you have ten thousand guardians in Christ, you do not have many fathers. For I became your father in Christ Jesus through the gospel. 16 So I urge you to be imitators of me. 17 That is why I sent you Timothy, my beloved and faithful child in the Lord. He will remind you of my ways in Christ, just as I teach them everywhere and in every church. 18 Now some of you have become puffed up, acting as though I were not coming to you. 19 But I will come to you soon, if the Lord wills. Then I will know not merely the words of these who are so puffed up, but I will see their power. 20 For the kingdom of God does not consist in words but in power. 21 What do you want? Should I come to you with a rod or with love and in a spirit of gentleness?
Paul contrasts the Corinthians' pride with the apostles' humility. The Corinthian believers had no reason to be proud. All that they had, and all they were, was a gift from God. (See: apostle)
Paul uses many metaphors in this chapter. He describes the apostles as servants. Paul speaks of a victory parade where the apostles are the prisoners who will be killed. He uses a rod to stand for punishment. He calls himself their father because he is their "spiritual father." (See: and spirit)
Paul uses irony to shame the Corinthians for being proud. The Corinthian believers are reigning but the apostles are suffering.
Paul uses several rhetorical questions in this chapter. He uses them to emphasize important points as he teaches the Corinthians.
Having just reminded the people not to be proud concerning who had taught them about the Lord and who had baptized them, Paul reminds the Corinthian believers that all believers are to be humble servants.
Paul is speaking of himself as if he were speaking about other people. Alternate translation: "of us stewards is that we"
Paul is comparing the difference between human judgment and God's judgment. Man's judgment is not important compared to God's true judgment upon man.
"I have not heard anyone accuse me of doing wrong"
It would still be possible for Paul to be guilty even if there were no charge against him. This can be translated in active form. Alternate translation: "that does not mean that God has declared me innocent"
"It is the Lord who will decide if I am innocent or guilty"
"Because what I have just said is true,"
Here "bring to light the hidden things of darkness" is a metaphor for making known to everyone things that were done in secret. Here "heart" is a metonym for people's thoughts and intentions. Alternate translation: "Like a light that shines on things in darkness, God will show what people have secretly done and what they secretly planned"
Here this means fellow Christians, including both men and women.
"for your welfare"
Paul is speaking to the Corinthians as if they were one person, so all instances of "you" here are singular.
Paul is rebuking the Corinthians who think they are better than those who heard the gospel from someone else. Alternate translation: "For there is no difference between you and others." or "For you are not superior to other people."
Paul uses this question to emphasize that they did not earn the things they have. Alternate translation: "Everything that you have is what you have received." or "God gave to you everything that you have!"
Paul was rebuking them for boasting in what they had. Alternate translation: "you should not boast as if you had not received it." or "you have no right to boast!"
Paul uses irony here to shame the Corinthians and make them realize that they are sinning when they are proud of themselves and their teachers.
Paul expresses two ways that God has put his apostles on display for the world to see.
God has displayed the apostles just like prisoners who are at the end of a Roman military parade and who are humiliated before their execution.
God put the apostles on display like men who are about to be executed.
Possible meanings are 1) "the world" consists of both supernatural
Paul uses irony to shame the Corinthians so they will think about what he is saying.
"People treat you Corinthians as though you were important people"
"people shame us apostles"
"Until now" or "Up to now"
This refers to hitting with the hand, not with whips or clubs. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "people beat us"
Paul means that they have to move around from place to place. Although they have places to stay, they have no permanent home.
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "When people slander us, we bless them" or "When people scorn us, we bless them"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "When people persecute us"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "When people slander us"
"People began to consider us—and they still consider us—to be the garbage of the world"
"the worst kind of garbage in the world"
"I do not intend to shame you, but I want to correct you"
Because Paul had led the Corinthians to Christ, they are like his spiritual children.
This is an exaggeration of the number of people guiding them, to emphasize the importance of the one spiritual father. Alternate translation: "very many guardians" or "a large crowd of guardians"
Paul is emphasizing firstly that his relationship with the Corinthians is most importantly "in Christ," secondly that it came because he told them the good news, and thirdly that he is the one who is like a father to them. Alternate translation: "it was because God joined you to Christ when I told you the good news that I was the one who became your father"
Because Paul had led the Corinthians to Christ, he is like a father to them.
This page has intentionally been left blank.
"whom I love and whom I teach about the Lord as if he were my own child"
This word indicates that Paul is shifting his topic. Here he begins to rebuke the arrogant behavior of the Corinthian believers.
"I will visit you"
This page has intentionally been left blank.
Paul was making a last appeal to the Corinthians, as he has been rebuking them for the errors they had made. Alternate translation: "Tell me what you want to happen now."
Paul is offering the Corinthians two opposing attitudes he could use when approaching them. Alternate translation: "If you want, I can come to punish you, or I can come to show you how much I love you by being gentle with you."
"of kindness" or "of tenderness"
1 We heard a report that there is sexual immorality among you, a kind of immorality that is not even permitted among the pagans: A man has his father's wife. 2 You are puffed up! Should you not mourn instead, so that the one who did this deed might be removed from among you? 3 For even though I am absent in body, I am present in spirit. I have already passed judgment on the one who did this, just as though I were there. 4 When you are assembled in the name of our Lord Jesus and I am with you in spirit, and the power of our Lord Jesus is present, 5 deliver this man over to Satan for the destruction of the flesh, so that his spirit may be saved on the day of the Lord. 6 Your boasting is not good. Do you not know that a little yeast leavens the whole loaf? 7 Cleanse yourselves of the old yeast so that you may be a new batch of dough, unleavened, just as you really are. For Christ, our Passover lamb, has been sacrificed. 8 So let us then celebrate the festival, not with the old yeast, the yeast of bad behavior and wickedness. Instead, let us celebrate with the unleavened bread of sincerity and truth.
9 I wrote to you in my letter not to associate with sexually immoral people. 10 In no way did I mean the immoral people of this world, or the greedy, or swindlers, or idolaters, since to stay away from them you would need to go out of the world. 11 But now I am writing to you not to associate with anyone who is called a brother but who is living in sexual immorality, or who is greedy, or is an idolater, or is verbally abusive, or is a drunkard, or a swindler. Do not even eat a meal with such a person. 12 For how am I involved with judging those who are outside the church? Instead, are you not to judge those who are inside the church? 13 But God judges those who are on the outside.
"Remove the evil person from among you."
Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page to make them easier to read. The ULB does this with the quoted words of verse 13.
Paul uses euphemisms to describe sensitive topics. This chapter deals with sexual immorality of one church member. (See: and fornication)
Paul uses an extended comparison that contains many metaphors. Yeast represents evil. The loaf probably represents the whole congregation. The unleavened bread represents living purely. So the whole passage means: Don't you know that a little evil will affect the whole congregation? So get rid of the evil so you can live purely. Christ has been sacrificed for us. So let us be sincere and truthful and not wicked and behaving badly. (See:, evil, unleavenedbread, purify, and passover)
Paul uses rhetorical questions in this chapter. He uses them to emphasize important points as he teaches the Corinthians.
Paul now specifically states about what sin of theirs he has heard, and how the Corinthian believers are proud of their acceptance of that man and his sin.
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "that not even the Gentiles permit"
"A man among you is commiting adultery with his father's wife"
the wife of his father, but probably not his own mother
This rhetorical question is used to scold the Corinthians. Alternate translation: "You should mourn over this instead ... among you!"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "you can remove from among you the one who did this deed"
"I am with you in spirit." Being with them in spirit represents caring about them or wanting to be with them. Alternate translation: "I care about you" or "I want to be with you"
Possible meanings are 1) "I have decided what you should do with the one who did this" or 2) "I have found the person who did this guilty"
"When you are together" or "When you meet together"
Possible meanings are 1) the name of the Lord Jesus is a metonym that represents his authority. Alternate translation: "with the authority of our Lord Jesus" or 2) being assembled in the Lord's name implies meeting together to worship him. Alternate translation: "to worship our Lord Jesus"
This means make the man leave the Christian community so that he will no longer be protected from Satan. Alternate translation: “hand this man over to Satan by sending him away from the Christian community”
Possible meanings are 1) "flesh" refers to his physical body. Alternate translation: "so that Satan may harm his body" or 2) "flesh" is a metaphor for the sinful nature. Alternate translation: "so that his sinful nature will be destroyed" or "so that he will not continue to live according to his sinful nature"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "so that God may save his spirit on the day of the Lord"
"Your boasting is bad"
Paul uses this proverb to mean that a small part of something affects the whole thing. In this case, one person who is sinning can harm the entire Christian community.
Here Paul uses a rhetorical question to teach his audience. Alternate translation: "You know that a little yeast ... loaf." or "A little yeast ... loaf."
Paul uses the proverb from 5:6 to teach his audience. Here "old yeast" is a metaphor for the sins that the people were committing. "Unleavened dough" is the type of bread that God told the Israelites was acceptable to eat when celebrating Passover. Paul is telling his audience to stop sinning so that they may be acceptable to God.
As the Passover lamb covered the sins of Israel by faith each year, so did Christ's death cover the sins of all who trust in Christ by faith for eternity. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "the Lord has sacrificed Christ, our Passover lamb"
Paul continues using the proverb from 5:6 to teach his audience. Here "yeast" is a metaphor for sin, and "unleavened bread" is metaphor for behaviors acceptable to God.
This page has intentionally been left blank.
This means unbelievers who have chosen to live immoral lives.
"those who are greedy" or "those who are willing to be dishonest to get what others have"
This means people who cheat to get others' property.
"you would need to avoid all people"
Paul tells them how to treat believers in the church who refuse to be corrected for their involvement in sexual immorality or other obvious sins.
"anyone who calls himself"
Here this means a fellow Christian, either a man or a woman.
Paul uses a question to emphasize that he is not the one to judge people outside the church. This can also be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "I am not the one who should judge people who do not belong to the church."
Paul is using a question to scold the Corinthians. Alternate translation: "you should know that you are the ones who should judge those who are inside the church."
This page has intentionally been left blank.
1 When one of you has a dispute against another, does he dare to bring a lawsuit before the unrighteous rather than before God's holy people? 2 Do you not know that God's holy people will judge the world? If then you will judge the world, are you not able to settle matters of little importance? 3 Do you not know that we will judge the angels? How much more, then, can we judge matters of this life? 4 If then you have to make judgments that pertain to daily life, why do you lay such cases as these before those who have no standing in the church? 5 I say this to your shame. Is there no one among you wise enough to settle a dispute between brothers? 6 But one brother brings a lawsuit against another brother—and this before unbelievers! 7 The fact that you have lawsuits with one another is already a defeat for you. Why not rather suffer the wrong? Why not rather allow yourselves to be cheated? 8 But you yourselves do wrong and you cheat, and you do this to your own brothers! 9 Do you not know that the unrighteous will not inherit the kingdom of God? Do not be deceived: neither the sexually immoral, nor idolaters, nor adulterers, nor men who submit to homosexual acts, nor men who perform homosexual acts, 10 nor thieves, nor the greedy, nor drunkards, nor slanderers, nor swindlers will inherit the kingdom of God. 11 That is what some of you were like. But you have been cleansed, you have been sanctified, you have been justified in the name of the Lord Jesus Christ and by the Spirit of our God.
12 "Everything is lawful for me," but not everything is profitable. "Everything is lawful for me," but I will not be mastered by any of them. 13 "Food is for the stomach, and the stomach is for food," but God will do away with both of them. The body is not intended for sexual immorality. Instead, the body is for the Lord, and the Lord will provide for the body. 14 God both raised the Lord and will also raise us up by his power. 15 Do you not know that your bodies are members of Christ? Should I then take the members of Christ and join them to a prostitute? May it not be! 16 Do you not know that he who is joined to a prostitute becomes one body with her? As scripture says, "The two will become one flesh." 17 But he who is joined to the Lord becomes one spirit with him. 18 Run away from sexual immorality! Every other sin that a person commits is outside the body, but the sexually immoral person sins against his own body. 19 Do you not know that your body is a temple of the Holy Spirit, who lives within you, whom you have from God? Do you not know that you are not your own? 20 For you were bought with a price. Therefore glorify God with your body and in your spirit, which belong to God.
Paul teaches that a Christian should not take another Christian to court before a non-Christian judge. It is better to be cheated. Christians will judge the angels. So they should be able to solve problems among themselves. (See: judge)
The temple of the Holy Spirit is an important metaphor. It refers to the place where the Holy Spirit stays and is worshiped.
Paul uses several rhetorical questions in this chapter. He uses them to emphasize important points as he teaches the Corinthians.
Paul explains how believers are to settle disagreements with other believers.
in this case a legal complaint, argument, or disagreement
Paul is angry because the Corinthians are doing a great wrong by taking their disputes with each other to the civil court. Alternate translation: "it is wrong for him to dare ... holy people." or "he should fear God and not ... God's holy people."
to ask unrighteous people, rather than God's holy people, to judge who is right and who is wrong
Paul uses a question to shame the Corinthians for their behavior. Alternate translation: "You act like you do not know that God's holy people will judge the world."
Because they will be given greater responsibility later, they should be responsible for lesser things now. Alternate translation: "You will judge the world in the future, so you should be able to settle this small matter now."
"stop arguments about things that have to do with this life"
Paul is surprised that they do not seem to know. Alternate translation: "You know that we will judge the angels."
Paul includes himself and the Corinthians.
Because they will be given greater responsibility later, they should be responsible for lesser things now. Alternate translation: "Because we know we will judge the angels, we can also be sure that God will enable us to judge matters in this life."
"If you are called upon to make decisions about daily life" or "If you must settle matters that are important in this life"
Possible meanings are that 1) this is a rhetorical question and Paul is rebuking the Corinthians for laying their cases before people of no standing in the church. Alternate translation: "you should not lay such cases as these before those who have no standing in the church." or 2) this is a command to lay their cases before even people of no standing in the church, rather than to people outside of the church. Alternate translation: "lay cases such as these even before people in the church who have no standing, not before people outside of the church."
"to your dishonor" or "to show how you have failed in this matter"
Paul is shaming the Corinthians. Alternate translation: "You should be ashamed that you cannot find a wise believer to settle arguments between brothers"
Here this means fellow Christians, including both men and women.
argument or disagreement
"But brothers who have disputes with each other ask judges who do not believe in Christ to make decisions for them" or "It is bad that brothers have such bad disputes with each other that they go to court; it is even worse that those courts are run by unbelievers"
Here "brother" means fellow Christian, including both men and women.
asks the civil court to judge the matter
Possible meanings are 1) "and the brothers have unbelieving judges make decisions for them" or 2) "and unbelievers in the community see brothers disputing with one another"
"is already a failure"
Paul continues to shame the Corinthians. Alternate translation: "It would be better to let others wrong you and cheat you than to take them to court."
Here "brothers" means fellow Christians, including both men and women.
Paul emphasizes that they should already know this truth. Alternate translation: "You already know that ... kingdom of God."
Receiving what God has promised believers is spoken of as if it were inheriting property and wealth from a family member.
God will not judge them as righteous at the judgment, and they will not enter eternal life.
Both of these phrases refer to men who have sex with other men.
people who steal from others
people who are willing to use evil means to take others' property
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "God has cleansed you"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "God has set you apart for himself"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "God has made you right with him"
"Name" here is a metonym for the power and authority of Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: "by the power and authority of our Lord Jesus Christ"
Paul reminds the Corinthian believers that God wants them pure because Christ has bought them with his death. Their bodies are now God's temple. He does so by saying what the Corinthians might say and then correcting them.
Possible meanings are 1) Paul is saying what some Corinthians might be thinking. Alternate translation: "People say, 'I am allowed to do anything,' but" or 2) Paul is saying what he thinks is true. Alternate translation: "I am allowed to do anything, but"
Paul is answering whoever says, "Everything is lawful for me." Alternate translation: "but not everything is good for me"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "I will not allow these things to rule over me like a master"
Possible meanings are 1) Paul is correcting what some Corinthians might be thinking, "food is for the stomach, and the stomach is for food," by answering that God will do away with both the stomach and food or 2) Paul actually agrees that "food is for the stomach, and the stomach is for food," but he is adding that God will do away with both of them.
One possible meanings is that the speaker is speaking indirectly of the body and sex, but you should translate this literally as "stomach" and "food."
"destroy"
"caused the Lord to live again"
The word translated as "members" refers to parts of a body. Our belonging to Christ is spoken of as if we were parts of his body. We belong to him so much that even our bodies belong to him. Paul uses this question to remind the people of something they should already know. Alternate translation: "You should know that your bodies belong to Christ."
Paul uses this question to emphasize how wrong it is for someone who belongs to Christ to go to a prostitute. Alternate translation: "I am part of Christ. I will not take my body and join myself to a prostitute!" or "We are parts of Christ's body. We must not take our bodies and join ourselves to prostitutes!"
"That should never happen!" or "We must never do that!"
Paul begins to teach the Corinthians by emphasizing a truth that they already know. "I want to remind you that ... her."
This can also be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "when a man joins his body to the body of a prostitute, it is as if their bodies become one body"
This can also be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "when the Lord joins his spirit to the spirit of a person, it is as if their spirits become one spirit"
Paul speaks of a person rejecting sexual sin as if that person were running away from danger. Alternate translation: "Get away from"
Possible meanings are 1) Paul is showing that sexual sin is especially bad because it is not only against others but against the sinner's own body or 2) Paul is quoting what some Corinthians were thinking. Alternate translation: "immorality! Some of you are saying, 'Every sin that a person commits is outside the body,' but I say that"
"evil deed that a person does"
Paul is continuing to teach the Corinthians by emphasizing what they already know. Alternate translation: "I want to remind you ... God and that you are not your own."
the body of each individual Christian is a temple of the Holy Spirit
A temple is dedicated to divine beings, and it is also where they dwell. In the same way, the bodies of believers are like temples because the Holy Spirit lives within them.
God paid for the freedom of the Corinthians from the slavery of sin. This can be stated in an active form. Alternate translation: "God paid for your freedom"
"Because what I have just said is true,"
1 Now concerning the issues you wrote about: "It is good for a man not to touch a woman." 2 But because of temptations for many immoral acts, each man should have his own wife, and each woman should have her own husband. 3 The husband should fulfill his duty to have sexual relations with his wife, and in the same way the wife to her husband. 4 It is not the wife who has authority over her own body, it is the husband. In the same way, the husband does not have authority over his own body, but the wife does. 5 Do not deprive each other, except by mutual agreement and for a specific period of time. Do this so that you may devote yourselves to prayer. Then you should come together again, so that Satan may not tempt you because of your lack of self-control.
6 But I say these things to you as a concession and not as a command. 7 I wish that everyone were as I am. But each one has his own gift from God. One has this kind of gift, and another that kind. 8 To the unmarried and to widows I say that it is good for them if they remain unmarried, as I am. 9 But if they cannot exercise self-control, they should marry. For it is better for them to marry than to burn with passion. 10 Now to the married I give this command—not I, but the Lord—the wife should not separate from her husband 11 (but if she does separate from her husband, she should remain unmarried or else be reconciled to her husband), and the husband should not divorce his wife. 12 But to the rest I say—I, not the Lord—that if any brother has a wife who is an unbeliever, and if she is content to live with him, he should not divorce her. 13 If a woman has an unbelieving husband, and if he is content to live with her, she should not divorce him. 14 For the unbelieving husband is set apart because of his wife, and the unbelieving wife is set apart because of the brother. Otherwise your children would be unclean, but actually they are set apart. 15 But if the unbeliever departs, let him go. In such cases, the brother or sister is not bound to their vows. God has called us to live in peace. 16 For how do you know, woman, whether you will save your husband? Or how do you know, man, whether you will save your wife? 17 However, as the Lord has given each one his portion, let each one walk as God has called him. This is my rule in all the churches. 18 Was anyone circumcised when he was called to believe? He should not try to appear uncircumcised. Was anyone uncircumcised when he was called to faith? He should not be circumcised. 19 For it is neither circumcision nor uncircumcision that matters. What matters is obeying the commandments of God. 20 Each one should remain in the calling he was in when God called him to believe. 21 Were you a slave when God called you? Do not be concerned about it. But if you can become free, take advantage of it. 22 For someone who is called by the Lord as a slave is the Lord's freeman. In the same way, the one who was free when he was called to believe is Christ's slave. 23 You have been bought with a price, so do not become slaves of men. 24 Brothers, in whatever situation he was in when he was called, let each one remain with God in that.
25 Now concerning virgins, I have no commandment from the Lord. But I give my opinion as one who, by the Lord's mercy, is trustworthy. 26 Therefore, I think that because of the disaster that is coming, it is good for a man to remain as he is. 27 Are you bound to a wife? Do not seek a divorce. If you are free of a wife, do not seek a wife. 28 But if you do marry, you have not sinned, and if a virgin marries, she has not sinned. But those who do will have many kinds of fleshly trouble, and I want to spare you from this. 29 But this I say, brothers: The time is short. From now on, let those who have wives live as though they had none. 30 Those who weep should act as though they were not weeping, and those who rejoice as though they were not rejoicing, and those who buy as though they did not possess anything, 31 and those who use the world should not act as though they are using it to the full. For the world in its present form is coming to an end. 32 I would like you to be free from worries. The unmarried man is concerned about the things of the Lord, how to please him. 33 But the married man is concerned about the things of the world, how to please his wife— 34 he is divided. The unmarried woman or the virgin is concerned about the things of the Lord, how to be set apart in body and in spirit. But the married woman is concerned about the things of the world, how to please her husband. 35 I say this for your own benefit, and not to put any constraint on you. I say this for what is right, so that you may be devoted to the Lord without any distraction. 36 But if anyone thinks that he is not treating his virgin with respect—if she is beyond the age of marriage and it must be so—he should do what he wants. He is not sinning. They should marry. 37 But if he is standing firm in his heart, if he is not under pressure but can control his own will, and if he has decided in his own heart to do this, to keep his own a virgin, he will do well. 38 So the one who marries his virgin does well, and the one who chooses not to marry will do even better. 39 A woman is bound to her husband while he lives. But if her husband dies, she is free to marry anyone she wishes, but only in the Lord. 40 Yet in my judgment she would be happier if she lives as she is. And I think that I also have the Spirit of God.
Paul begins to answer a series of questions that the Corinthians may have asked him. The first question is about marriage. The second question is about a slave trying to become free, a Gentile becoming a Jew, or a Jew becoming a Gentile.
Paul says married Christians should not divorce. A Christian married to an unbeliever should not leave their husband or wife. If the unbelieving husband or wife leaves, this is not a sin. Paul advises that, because of the difficult times and because it is near to the time that Jesus will return, it is good to remain unmarried. (See: believe and sin)
Paul uses many euphemisms to discreetly refer to sexual relations. This is often a sensitive topic. Many cultures do not wish to speak openly about these matters.
Paul gives the believers some specific instructions on marriage.
Paul is introducing a new topic in his teaching.
The Corinthians had written a letter to Paul to ask for answers to certain questions.
Possible meanings are 1) Paul is quoting what the Corinthians had written. Alternate translation: "you wrote, 'It is good for a man not to touch a woman.'" or 2) Paul is saying what he really thinks. Alternate translation: "my answer is that yes, it is good for a man not to touch a woman."
"It is most helpful"
Possible meanings are 1) "a man" refers to a married man. Alternate translation: "a husband" or 2) "a man" refers to any man.
Possible meanings are 1) "touch a woman" is a euphemism for having sexual relations. Alternate translation: "not to have sexual relations with his wife for a while" or 2) "touch a woman" is a metonym for marry. Alternate translation: "not to marry"
Possible meanings are 1) Paul is responding to what the Corinthians had written. Alternate translation: "That is true, but because" or 2) Paul is saying what he really thinks.
"But because Satan tempts people to commit sexual sin, each" or "But we desire to commit sexual sin because of our sinful nature, so each"
Husbands should regularly have sexual relations with their wives. Alternate translation: "should give to his wife her sexual rights"
The words "should fulfill" and "duty to have sexual relations" are understood from the previous phrase, as is the meaning of the euphemism. Alternate translation: "in the same way, the wife should fulfill her duty to have sexual relations with her husband" or "in the same way, the wife should give to her husband his sexual rights"
This page has intentionally been left blank.
This double negative emphasizes that mutual agreement is necessary. Alternate translation: "Only if you both agree to deprive each other should you do so, and even then only do so for"
The word "deprive" means to keep from someone something that the other person has the right to receive, in this case marital relations. "Do not refuse to have marital relations with your spouse"
in order to have a period of especially deep prayer
"commit yourselves"
"sleep together again"
"because after some days, your sexual desires will be harder to keep under control"
Possible meanings are Paul is telling the Corinthians that he is allowing them, but not commanding them, 1) to marry and sleep together or 2) to stop sleeping together for a time.
Either Paul had never married or his wife had died. It is unlikely that he had been through a divorce.
"But God enables people to do different things. He enables one person to do one thing and another person to do something different"
"those who are not married"
"to women whose husbands have died"
See how you translated this in 1 Corinthians 7:1.
"to live with the constant desire to sleep with someone"
Paul's readers knew no difference between separating and divorcing. To stop living with someone was to end the marriage. Alternate translation: "should not divorce"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "she should make peace with her husband and return to him"
Paul's readers knew no difference between divorcing and simply separating. To do either was to end the marriage. Alternate translation: "should not separate from"
willing or satisfied
This page has intentionally been left blank.
Possible meanings are 1) "For God has set apart the unbelieving husband for himself because of his believing wife" or 2) "God treats the unbelieving husband as he would treat a son for the sake of his believing wife"
Possible meanings are 1) "God has set apart the unbelieving wife for himself because of her husband who believes" or 2) "God treats the unbelieving wife as he would treat a daughter for the sake of her husband who believes"
the believing man or husband
Possible meanings are 1) "God has set them apart for himself" or 2) "God treats them as he would treat his own children"
Here "brother" and "sister" refers to a Christian husband or wife. Here "not bound to their vows" is a metaphor that mean the person is not obligated to do what they vowed to do. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "In such cases, God does not require the believing spouse to continue to obey the marriage vow"
Paul is speaking to the Corinthians as if they were one person, so all instances of "you" and "your" here are singular.
Paul uses a question to cause women to think deeply about what he is saying. Alternate translation: "you cannot know if you will save your unbelieving husband."
Paul uses a question to cause men to think deeply about what he is saying. Alternate translation: "you cannot know if you will save your unbelieving wife."
No matter what is true for the people in any of the situations Paul has just been discussing, he addresses the following words to everyone.
God giving people skills and work to do and guiding the events of their lives is spoken of as if he were dividing physical objects and giving parts out to them. Alternate translation: "as the Lord has assigned each one his life"
"each believer"
The word "walk" is a metaphor for "live." Possible meanings of the word "called" are 1) it refers to people responding to the gospel. Alternate translation: "each one should live as he was when he became a Christian." Or 2) it is a metaphor for "commanded" or "instructed." Alternate translation: "each one should live as God has instructed him to" or "each one should follow God's commands as he lives his life"
Paul was teaching believers in all the churches to act in this manner.
Paul was addressing the circumcised ones
Paul was now addressing the uncircumcised ones. Alternate translation: "If someone was uncircumcised when God called him to believe, he"
This page has intentionally been left blank.
Here "calling" refers to the work or social position in which you were involved. Alternate translation: "live and work as you did"
Paul is speaking to the Corinthians as if they were one person, so all instances of "you" and the command "be" here are singular.
This can be stated as a statement. Alternate translation: "To anyone who was a slave when God called you to believe, I say this: do not be concerned"
This freeman is forgiven by God and therefore free from Satan and sin.
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "Christ bought you by dying for you"
Here this means fellow Christians, including both men and women.
"whether he was married or unmarried, slave or free, when he was called"
You may need to make explicit who called and use an active verb. Alternate translation: "God called him"
called to believe in Christians
"each one should remain." That is, each one should remain slave, free, married, or unmarried, as he was when he first believed in Christ.
"as a person responsible to God"
Paul knows no teaching of Jesus that speaks about this situation. Alternate translation: "The Lord has not commanded me to say anything to people who have never married"
This is probably a synecdoche for anyone who has never married. Alternate translation: "people who have never married"
"I tell you what I think"
"because, by the Lord's mercy, I am trustworthy"
This page has intentionally been left blank.
Paul is speaking to the Corinthians as if he were speaking to each person, so all these instances of "you" and the command "do not seek" here are singular.
Paul uses this question to introduce a possible condition. The question can be translated as a phrase with "if." Alternate translation: "If you are bound to a wife, do not"
married
"Do not try to divorce her" or "Do try to separate from her"
"do not try to get married"
The word "fleshly" is a metonym for mortal life. Alternate translation: "trouble in this life"
The word "this" refers to the kinds of worldly trouble that married people might have. Alternate translation: "I want to help you not to have worldly trouble"
This is probably a synecdoche for anyone who has never married. See how you translated "virgins" in [1 Corinthians 7:25]
"There is little time" or "Time is almost gone"
cry or grieve with tears
"those who deal every day with unbelievers"
"should show by their actions that they have their hope in God"
Being "free from" something is an idiom which means having the ability to live without it." Alternate translation: "without needing to worry"
"focused on"
This page has intentionally been left blank.
"he is trying to please God and please his wife at the same time"
Possible meanings are 1) "virgin" refers only to virgins, while "unmarried woman" could be a divorcée or any other unmarried non-virgin, and 2) "unmarried woman" explains what Paul means by "virgin."
restriction
"can concentrate on"
"not being kind to his virgin" or "not honoring his virgin"
Possible meanings are 1) "the woman whom he promised to marry" or "his fiancée" or 2) "his virgin daughter."
Possible meanings are 1) "He should marry his fiancée" or 2) "He should let his daughter get married."
Here "standing firm" is a metaphor for deciding something with certainty. Here "heart" is metonym for a person's mind or thoughts. Alternate translation: "But if he has decided firmly in his own mind"
Or "So the one who allows his virgin daughter to marry does well, and the one who chooses not to have her marry will do even better." See how you translated "virgin" and "He should marry" in 1 Corinthians 7:36.
Here "bound" is a metaphor for a close relationship between people in which they support each other emotionally, spiritually, and physically. Here it means the union of marriage. Alternate translation: "A woman is married to her husband" or "A woman is united with her husband"
"for as long as he lives" or "until he dies"
"if the new husband is a believer"
"my understanding of God's word"
more contented, more joyful
"remains unmarried"
1 Now concerning food sacrificed to idols: We know that we all have knowledge. Knowledge puffs up, but love builds up. 2 If anyone thinks he knows something, that person does not yet know as he should know. 3 But if anyone loves God, that person is known by him. 4 Therefore, concerning the eating of food sacrificed to idols: We know that an idol in this world is nothing and that there is no God but one. 5 For even if there were so-called gods, either in heaven or on earth (just as there are many "gods" and many "lords"), 6 yet for us there is only one God, the Father, from whom are all things and for whom we live, and one Lord Jesus Christ, through whom all things exist, and through whom we exist.
7 However, this knowledge is not in everyone. Instead, some previously practiced idol worship, and they eat this food as if it were something sacrificed to an idol. Their conscience is thereby defiled because it is weak. 8 But food will not present us to God. We are not worse if we do not eat, nor better if we do eat it. 9 But take care that your freedom does not become a reason for someone who is weak in faith to stumble. 10 For suppose that someone sees you, who have knowledge, eating a meal in an idol's temple. Is not his weak conscience emboldened to eat what is offered to idols? 11 So because of your understanding about the true nature of idols, the weaker one, the brother for whom Christ died, is destroyed. 12 Thus, when you sin against your brothers and wound their weak consciences, you sin against Christ. 13 Therefore, if food causes my brother to stumble, I will never eat meat again, so that I may not cause my brother to fall.
In Chapters 8-10, Paul answers the question: "Is it acceptable to eat meat that has been sacrificed to an idol?"
Paul answers the question about eating meat sacrificed to idols by saying that idols are supposed to be gods but that those gods do not really exist. Therefore nothing is wrong with the meat. Christians are free to eat it. However, someone who does not understand this may see a Christian eating it. They may then be encouraged to eat the meat as an act of worship to the idol.
"We" means Paul and, though specifically writing to the Corinthian believers, includes all believers.
Paul reminds the believers that though idols have no power, believers must be careful not to affect the weaker believers who might think that the believers care about idols if the believers eat food that was sacrificed to idols. He tells believers to be careful with the freedom that they have in Christ.
Paul uses this phrase to move on to the next question the Corinthians had asked him.
Gentile worshipers would offer grain, fish, fowl, or meat to their gods. The priest would burn a portion of it on the altar. Paul is speaking of the portion the priest would give back for the worshiper to eat or sell in the market.
"Knowledge puffs people up." Here "puffs up" is a metaphor for making someone proud. The abstract noun "knowledge" can be expressed with the verb "know." Alternate translation: "Knowledge makes people proud" or "People who think that they know a lot become proud"
The abstract noun "love" can be expressed as a verb. Alternate translation: "but when we love people, we build them up"
Building people up represents helping them become mature and strong in their faith. Alternate translation: "love strengthens people" or "when we love people, we strengthen them"
"believes he knows everything about something"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "God knows that person"
"We" here refers to all believers and include Paul's audience.
Paul is probably quoting phrases that some Corinthians used. Being "nothing" represents having no power. Alternate translation: "We all know, as you yourselves like to say, that an idol in this world has no power and that there is no God but one"
"things that people call gods"
Paul does not believe that many gods and many lords exist, but he recognizes that the pagans believe they do.
"Us" and "we" here refer to all believers and include Paul's audience.
"yet we know that there is only one God"
Paul is speaking here of "weak" brothers, people who cannot separate food sacrificed to idols from the worship of those idols. If a Christian eats food that has been sacrificed to an idol, weak brothers might think that God will allow them to worship the idol by eating the food. Even if the eater has not worshiped the idol and is simply eating the food, he has still corrupted his weak brothers' conscience.
"all people ... some people who are now Christians"
ruined or harmed, especially as regards the person's relationship with God
Paul speaks of food as though it were a person who could make God welcome us. Alternate translation: "food does not give us favor with God" or "the food we eat does not make God pleased with us"
"Some people might think that if we do not eat some things, God will love us less. But they are wrong. Those who think that God will love us more if we do eat those things are also wrong"
believers not strong in their faith
Paul is speaking to the Corinthians as if they were one person, so these words are singular.
what he understands to be right and wrong
"encouraged to eat"
Paul is speaking to the Corinthians as if they were one person, so the word "your" here is singular.
The brother or sister who is not strong in his or her faith will sin or lose his or her faith.
This page has intentionally been left blank.
"Because what I have just said is true"
"Food" here is a metonym for the eating of food. Alternate translation: "if by eating I cause" or "if I, because of what I eat, cause"
1 Am I not free? Am I not an apostle? Have I not seen Jesus our Lord? Are you not my work in the Lord? 2 If I am not an apostle to others, at least I am to you. For you are the seal of my apostleship in the Lord. 3 This is my defense to those who examine me: 4 Do we not have the right to eat and drink? 5 Do we not have the right to take along a wife who is a believer, as do the rest of the apostles, and the brothers of the Lord, and Cephas? 6 Or do only I and Barnabas not have the right to not work at a trade? 7 Who serves as a soldier at his own expense? Who plants a vineyard and does not eat its fruit? Or who shepherds a flock and does not drink milk from it? 8 Do I say these things based on human authority? Does not the law also say this? 9 For it is written in the law of Moses, "Do not put a muzzle on an ox when it is threshing the grain." Is it really the oxen that God cares about? 10 Is he not speaking about us? It was written for us, because the one who plows should plow in hope, and the one who threshes should thresh in the hope of sharing in the harvest. 11 If we sowed spiritual things among you, is it too much for us to reap physical things from you? 12 If others exercised this right from you, do we not have even more? But we did not claim this right. Instead we endured everything rather than be a hindrance to the gospel of Christ. 13 Do you not know that those who perform sacred duties get their food from the temple? Do you not know that those who serve at the altar share in what is offered on the altar? 14 In the same way, the Lord commanded that those who proclaim the gospel should get their living from the gospel. 15 But I have not claimed any of these rights. And I do not write this so something might be done for me. It would be better for me to die than—No one will make my boast empty! 16 For if I preach the gospel, I have no reason for boasting, because I must do this. And woe be to me if I do not preach the gospel! 17 For if I do this willingly, I have a reward. But if not willingly, I still have a stewardship that was entrusted to me. 18 What then is my reward? That when I preach, I may offer the gospel without charge and so not take full use of my right in the gospel. 19 For though I am free from all, I became a servant to all, in order that I might win more. 20 To the Jews I became like a Jew, in order to win Jews. To those under the law, I became like one under the law in order to win those under the law. I did this even though I myself was not under the law. [1]21 To those outside the law, I became like one outside the law, although I was not outside the law of God myself, but under the law of Christ. I did this so that I may win those outside the law. 22 To the weak I became weak, so that I may win the weak. I have become all things to all people, so that I may by all means save some. 23 I do all things for the gospel's sake, so that I may participate in its blessings. 24 Do you not know that in a race all the runners run the race, but that only one receives the prize? So run to win the prize. 25 Every athlete exercises self-control in all things. They do it to receive a wreath that is perishable, but we do it to receive one that is imperishable. 26 Therefore this is how I run, as not without purpose; this is how I box, not as one beating the air. 27 But I subdue my body and make it a slave, so that after I have preached to others, I myself may not be disqualified.
Paul defends himself in this chapter. Some people claimed that he was trying to gain financially from the church.
People accused Paul of just wanting money from the church. Paul answered that he rightfully could get money from the church. The Old Testament taught that those who worked should get their living from their work. He and Barnabas purposefully never used this right and earned their own living.
Paul uses many metaphors in this chapter. These metaphors teach complex truths.
This passage is important because Paul "contextualizes" ministering the gospel to different audiences. This means that Paul makes himself and the gospel understandable without his actions hindering the gospel being received. The translator should take extra care to preserve aspects of this "contextualization" if possible. (See: goodnews)
Paul uses many rhetorical questions in this chapter. He uses them to emphasize various points as he teaches the Corinthians.
Paul explains how he uses the liberty he has in Christ.
Paul uses this rhetorical question to remind the Corinthians of the rights he has. Alternate translation: "I am a free person."
Paul uses this rhetorical question to remind the Corinthians of who he is and the rights he has. Alternate translation: "I am an apostle."
Paul uses this rhetorical question to remind the Corinthians of who he is. Alternate translation: "I have seen Jesus our Lord."
Paul uses this rhetorical question to remind the Corinthians of their relationship to him. Alternate translation: "You believe in Christ because I have worked the way the Lord wants me to."
"the result of the work that I have done"
The word "seal" here is a metaphor for the evidence needed to prove something. Alternate translation: "you are evidence I can use to prove that the Lord has chosen me to be an apostle"
Possible meanings are 1) the words that follow are Paul's defense or 2) the words in 1 Corinthians 9:1-2 are Paul's defense. Alternate translation: "This is my defense ... me."
Paul uses a rhetorical question to challenge what some people think about him and Barnabas. Alternate translation: "We have the right to receive food and drink from the churches."
Here "we" refers to Paul and Barnabas.
Paul uses a rhetorical question to challenge what some people think about him and Barnabas. Alternate translation: "We certainly have the right ... Cephas."
"a believing wife" or "a Christian wife"
Paul uses a rhetorical question to challenge what some people think about him and Barnabas. Alternate translation: "You seem to think that Barnabas and I are the only apostles who have no authority to not work at a trade"
If this double negative causes confusion in your language, you can state it as a simple positive. Alternate translation: "have to work at a trade" or "have to have another job"
Paul uses this rhetorical question as a part of his argument to show that he and Barnabas have the right to be supported by the church for their work. Alternate translation: "We all know that no soldier has to buy his own supplies." or "We all know that every soldier receives his supplies from the government."
Paul uses this rhetorical question as a part of his argument to show that he and Barnabas have the right to be supported by the church for their work. Alternate translation: "We all know that the one who plants a vineyard will be allowed to eat its fruit." or "No one expects that someone who plants a vineyard will be forbidden to eat its fruit."
Paul uses this rhetorical question as a part of his argument to show that he and Barnabas have the right to be supported by the church for their work. Alternate translation: "We all know that those who shepherd flocks may drink milk from the flocks"
Paul uses these rhetorical questions as a part of his argument to show that he and Barnabas have the right to be supported by the church for their work. Alternate translation: "I am not saying these things based on human authority. The law also says this."
Moses was speaking to the Israelites as if they were one person, so this command is singular.
Paul uses this rhetorical question as a part of his argument to show that he and Barnabas have the right to be supported by the church for their work. Alternate translation: "God does not only care about the oxen."
Paul uses this rhetorical question as a part of his argument to show that he and Barnabas have the right to be supported by the church for their work. Alternate translation: "Instead, God was certainly speaking about us."
"should plow, expecting to receive something for his work" or "should plow, expecting to share in the harvest"
"should thresh, expecting to share in the harvest"
"receiving some of the crop that is collected"
Here "sowed spiritual things" and "reap physical things" are metaphors meaning Paul and Barnabas taught the Corinthians about Christ and spiritual things, so they deserve for the church to support them for their work. Alternate translation: "If we taught you about Christ and spiritual truths, is it too much for us to receive money from you for our work?
Paul uses this rhetorical question as a part of his argument to show that he and Barnabas have the right to be supported by the church for their work. Alternate translation: "then it should not be too much for us to reap physical things from you."
Paul uses this rhetorical question as a part of his argument to show that he and Barnabas have the right to be supported by the church for their work. Alternate translation: "If others exercised ... you, then we have that right even more."
Paul and the Corinthians both know that others exercised the right. Alternate translation: "Since others exercised this right"
other workers of the gospel
the right to have the believers at Corinth provide for the living expenses of those who told them the good news
"be a burden to" or "stop the spread of"
Paul uses a rhetorical question to remind the Corinthians of what they know so he can add new information. Alternate translation: "I want to remind you that those who perform sacred duties get their food from the temple."
"perform sacred duties in the temple" or "work in the temple"
Paul uses a rhetorical question to remind the Corinthians of what they know so he can add new information. Alternate translation: "I want to remind you that those who serve at the altar get some of the foods and meat that people offer on the altar."
The words "the gospel" here are a metonym for 1) the people to whom they tell the gospel, "receive their food and other things they need from those to whom they teach the good news," or 2) the result of working to tell the gospel, "receive their food and other things they need because they work to tell the good news."
"these things that I deserve"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "so you will do something for me"
Paul seems to have started a new sentence before finishing the first one. Some modern translations read, "It would be better for me to die than to have someone deprive me of this boast."
"I would rather." Paul is speaking of what he desires, not necessarily of what God thinks is best.
"take away this opportunity I have to boast" or "make it so I have nothing to boast about"
"I must preach the gospel"
"may I suffer misfortune if"
"if I preach willingly" or "if I preach because I want to"
The words "I do this" are understood from the previous phrase. Alternate translation: "But if I do this unwillingly" or "But if I do this even though I do not want to" or "But if I do this because I was forced to do it"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "I still must complete this work that God entrusted to me" or "I still must do this work that God gave me to complete"
Paul is preparing them for the new information he is going to give them. Alternate translation: "This is my reward."
"My reward for preaching is that I can preach without receiving payment"
"preach the gospel"
"so not ask people to support me as I travel and preach"
Paul uses the image of freedom from slavery to talk about not being obligated to others. Alternate translation: "I am free of obligation to all" or "Though I am not obligated to anyone"
Paul uses the image of slavery to talk about his willingness to meet others' needs. Alternate translation: "I became like a servant to all" or "I became willing to serve all"
"persuade others to believe" or "help others trust in Christ"
"I acted like a Jew" or "I practiced Jewish customs"
"I became like one committed to following the demands of the Jewish leadership, accepting their understanding of the Jewish scriptures"
To be "outside the law" is a metaphor that means not to be obligated to obey the law. "The "law" refers to the law of Moses, and "those outside the law" refers to the Gentiles. Alternate translation: "To Gentiles, who are not obligated to follow the law of Moses, I became like them"
The phrases "not outside the law" and "under the law" are metaphors that mean to be obligated to obey the law. Alternate translation: "although I was not one of those who is not obligated to obey the law of God, but I was obligated to obey the law of Christ"
This page has intentionally been left blank.
This page has intentionally been left blank.
Paul explains that he uses the liberty he has in Christ to discipline himself.
Paul is reminding the Corinthians of what they know so he can add new information. Alternate translation: "Let me remind you that although all runners run the race, only one runner receives the prize."
Paul compares living the Christian life and working for God to running a race and being an athlete. As in a race, the Christian life and work require strict discipline on the part of the runner, and, as in a race, the Christian has a specific goal.
Paul is speaking of the reward God will give his faithful people as if it were a prize given for an athletic contest.
A wreath is a bunch of leaves twisted together. Wreaths were given as prizes to athletes who won games and races. Paul speaks of eternal life as if it were a wreath that would never dry up.
These are both metaphors for living the Christian life and serving God by working as hard as one can to succeed and so gain something good and to avoid failing and so losing something good.
This is running in a race to win a prize.
If this double negative would confuse the reader in your language, you can state it as a simple positive. Alternate translation: "run: with purpose"
to beat another person with the fists in a sporting contest
This passive sentence can be rephrased to an active form. The judge of a race or competition is a metaphor for God. Alternate translation: "the judge will not disqualify me" or "God will not say that I have failed to obey the rules"
1 I do not want you to be uninformed, brothers, that our fathers were all under the cloud and all passed through the sea. 2 All were baptized into Moses in the cloud and in the sea, 3 and all ate the same spiritual food. 4 All drank the same spiritual drink. For they drank from a spiritual rock that followed them, and that rock was Christ. 5 But God was not well pleased with most of them, and their corpses were scattered about in the wilderness. 6 Now these things were examples for us, so we would not be those who lust for evil things as they lusted. 7 Do not be idolaters, as some of them were. This is as it is written, "The people sat down to eat and drink, and rose up to play." 8 Let us not commit sexual immorality, as many of them did. In one day, twenty-three thousand people died because of it. 9 Neither let us put Christ to the test, as many of them tested him and were destroyed by snakes. 10 Also do not grumble, as many of them did and were destroyed by an angel of death. 11 Now these things happened to them as examples for us. They were written for our instruction—for us on whom the end of the ages has come. 12 Therefore let anyone who thinks he stands be careful that he does not fall. 13 No temptation has overtaken you that is not common to all humanity. Instead, God is faithful. He will not let you be tempted beyond your ability. With the temptation he will also provide the way of escape, so that you may be able to endure it.
14 Therefore, my beloved ones, run away from idolatry. 15 I speak to you as people who have understanding, so you may judge what I say. 16 The cup of blessing that we bless, is it not a sharing in the blood of Christ? The bread that we break, is it not a sharing in the body of Christ? 17 Because there is one loaf of bread, we who are many are one body. We all take of one loaf of bread together. 18 Look at the Israel that is according to the flesh. Are not those who eat the sacrifices participants in the altar? 19 What am I saying then? That an idol is anything? Or that food sacrificed to an idol is anything? 20 But I say about the things they sacrifice, that they offer these things to demons and not to God. I do not want you to be participants with demons! 21 You cannot drink the cup of the Lord and the cup of demons. You cannot participate at the table of the Lord and the table of demons. 22 Or do we provoke the Lord to jealousy? Are we stronger than he is?
23 "Everything is lawful," but not everything is profitable. "Everything is lawful," but not everything builds people up. 24 No one should seek his own good. Instead, each one should seek the good of his neighbor. 25 Eat everything sold in the market without asking questions of conscience. 26 For "the earth is the Lord's, and the fullness of it." 27 If an unbeliever invites you to eat a meal, and you wish to go, eat whatever is set before you without asking questions of conscience. 28 But if someone says to you, "This has been offered in sacrifice," then do not eat it, both for the sake of the one who informed you, and for the sake of conscience— [1]29 the conscience of the other man, I mean, and not yours. For why should my freedom be judged by another's conscience? 30 If I partake of the meal with gratitude, why am I being insulted for that for which I gave thanks? 31 Therefore, whether you eat or drink, or whatever you do, do all to the glory of God. 32 Be blameless both to Jews and to Greeks, and to the church of God. 33 In the same way I try to please all people in all things. I do not seek my benefit, but that of the many. I do this so that they may be saved.
Chapters 8-10 together answer the question: "Is it acceptable to eat meat that has been sacrificed to an idol?"
In this chapter, Paul uses the exodus to warn people not to sin. Then he returns to discussing meat offered to idols. He uses the Lord's Supper as an example. (See: sin)
Paul uses the experiences of Israel leaving Egypt and roaming the desert as a warning to the believers. Although the Israelites all followed Moses, God did not allow most of them to enter the Promised Land. Some worshiped an idol, some tested God, and some grumbled. Paul warns Christians not to sin. We can resist temptation because God provides a way of escape. (See: promisedland)
Paul discusses meat offered to idols. Christians are allowed to eat, but doing so may hurt others. So when buying meat or eating meat with a friend, do not ask if it has been offered to idols. But if someone tells you it has been offered to idols, don't eat it for the sake of that person. Do not offend anyone. Seek to save them instead. (See: save)
Paul uses many rhetorical questions in this chapter. He uses them to emphasize important points as he teaches the Corinthians.
Paul reminds the Corinthians of the example of their ancient Jewish fathers' experiences with immorality and idolatry.
Paul is referring to the time of Moses in the book of Exodus when Israel fled through the Red Sea as the Egyptian army pursued them. Here "our" refers to Paul and includes the Corinthians. The Corinthians were not acutal descendants of the Israelites who escaped Egypt. Paul means that all Christians are spiritual descendants of Israel. Alternate translation: "our ancestors"
When the Israelites left Egypt, God traveled with them in a pillar of cloud. Alternate translation: "were all led by God who was in the cloud"
This sea is known by two names, the Red Sea and the Sea of Reeds.
"walked through" or "traveled through"
To be "baptized into Moses" means to become united with or to become a follower of Moses through baptism. The Israelites were not baptized in the way that Christians were baptized in the New Testament. Paul is comparing Christian being baptized as followers of Christ with the Israelites, who became followers of Moses as they walked across the Red Sea with God leading them in the cloud. Alternate translation: "It was like all of them were baptized when they followed Moses across the sea as God led them in the cloud"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "All received baptism"
Here "spiritual food" refers to the manna that God supernaturally supplied to the Israelites while they traveled in the wilderness. Alternate translation: "All ate the same food that God supernaturally provided from heaven"
Here "spiritual drink" refers to the water that God supernaturally caused to flow out of a rock. Alternate translation: "drank the same water that God supernaturally caused to come out of the rock ... supernatural rock"
The "rock" was a literal, physical rock, so it would be best to translate this literally. If your language cannot say that a rock "was" a person's name, treat the word "rock" as a metonym for the power of Christ that worked through the rock. Alternate translation: "it was Christ who worked through that rock"
"displeased" or "angry"
"most of the Israelite fathers" or "most of our ancestors"
"God scattered their dead bodies around" or "God killed them and scattered their bodies"
the desert land between Egypt and Israel through which the Israelites wandered for 40 years
This page has intentionally been left blank.
people who worship idols
"sat down to eat a meal"
Paul is quoting the Jewish scriptures. His readers would have understood from this one word that the people were worshiping an idol by singing and dancing and engaging in sexual activities, not simply enjoying innocent fun.
"God killed 23,000 people in one day"
"because they committed those unlawful sexual acts"
or "as many of them did"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "tested him. As a result, snakes destroyed them"
"complain"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "did. As a result, an angel of death destroyed them"
"God punished our ancestors"
Here "us" refers to all believers.
"the last days"
does not sin or reject God
This can be stated as a positive. Alternate translation: "Every temptation that has overtaken you is common to all humanity" or "The temptations that affect you are temptations that all people experience"
"He will only allow you to be tempted in ways that you are strong enough to resist"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "will not allow anyone to tempt you"
Paul continues to remind them to be pure and to stay away from idolatry and immorality as he talks about communion, which represents the blood and body of Christ.
Paul is speaking of the practice of worshiping idols as if it were a physical thing like a dangerous animal. Alternate translation: "do all you can to get away from worshiping idols"
This page has intentionally been left blank.
Paul is speaking of God's blessing as though it were the wine in the cup used in the ritual of the Lord's Supper.
"for which we thank God"
Paul is reminding the Corinthians of what they already know, that the cup of wine that we share represents us sharing in the blood of Christ. Alternate translation: "we share in the blood of Christ."
Paul is reminding the Corinthians of what they already know. Alternate translation: "We share in the body of Christ when we share bread."
"taking part in" or "equally participating with others in"
a single unit of baked bread that is sliced or broken into pieces before it is eaten
This refers to people who belonged to Israel because they were descendants of Israel. Alternate translation: "the natural Israel" or "the physical Israel" or "the people of Israel"
Paul uses a question to remind the Corinthians of what they already know so that he can give them new information. Alternate translation: "Those who eat the sacrifices share in the activities and the blessings of the altar."
Paul uses these rhetorical questions to clear up any confusion the Corinthians might have about what he meant. The second and third questions are elliptical, and the understood words can be provided. Alternate translation: "I am not saying that an idol is anything or that food sacrificed to an idol is anything." or "I am not saying that an idol is a real god or that food that has been sacrificed to idols has any power." or "What am I saying then? Am I saying that an idol is anything? Or am I saying that food sacrificed to an idol is anything?"
You may need to make explicit that the word "they" refers to Gentile pagans. Alternate translation: "the things that the Gentile pagans sacrifice"
Drinking from the cup of the Lord is a symbol of being united to the Lord, and drinking from the cup of demons is a symbol of being united to demons. It is impossible to be united to both the Lord and demons. Alternate translation: "You cannot be united to the Lord by drinking from his cup and also be united to demons by drinking from their cup
Here "cup" is a metonym for the wine in the cup. Alternate translation: "You cannot drink from the cup" or "You cannot drink the wine from the cup"
This refers to the cup of wine that people drink from when celebrating the Lord's supper.
This refers to anything people might drink during a meal dedicated to demons.
Here "participate at the table" refers to eating a meal together. The "table of the Lord" refers to a meal that people eat to honor the Lord. Alternate translation: "You cannot eat together at the table of the Lord and at the table of demons" or "You cannot join in eating to honor the Lord and join in eating to honor demons"
Paul uses a rhetorical question to remind the people of what they already know. Alternate translation: "Surely you do not want to provoke the Lord to jealousy."
to anger or irritate
Paul uses a rhetorical question to remind the people of what they already know. Alternate translation: "You are not stronger than he is."
In the rest of this chapter, Paul reminds the Corinthians that though they are free, they must care about others and not do things that could lead others to sin.
Possible meanings are 1) Paul is saying what some Corinthians might be thinking. Alternate translation: "People say, 'I am allowed to do anything'" or 2) Paul is saying what he thinks is true. Alternate translation: "I am allowed to do anything." This should be translated as in 1 Corinthians 6:12.
"some things are not profitable" or "some things do not help people"
Building people up represents helping them become mature and strong in their faith. See how you translated "builds up" in [1 Corinthians 8:1]
This page has intentionally been left blank.
Or "You may eat anything sold in the market." Paul is granting permission, not issuing a command.
Questions of conscience are questions that a person asks because he wants to know if something is sinful or not. In this case, a person might ask if the food at the market was offered to idols; if he thinks that it is sinful to eat food sacrificed to idols, he would feel guilty about eating it. Paul is saying that the person does not need to ask if the food has been sacrificed to an idol or not. Alternate translation: "without asking questions that could make the conscience feel guilty" or "without asking questions about whether it is sinful to eat it"
This quotation is from the Psalms in the Old Testament.
"and everything in it." This means that everything on the earth belongs to the Lord. By saying this, Paul shows that even meat at the market that was offered to idols belongs to the Lord.
See how you translated a similar phrase in 1 Corinthians 10:25.
Some translations put verse 28 and the first part of verse 29 in parentheses because the second part of verse 29 appears to give a reason for what Paul taught in verses 25-27 about not asking questions of conscience.
Here being offered in sacrifice means that it was offered to idols. This was the part of the meat that the worshiper was allowed to bring home after killing an animal as a sacrifice to an idol.
This is the first reason not to eat the meat. Alternate translation: "for the good of the one who informed you"
This is the second reason not to eat the meat. Alternate translation: "and because of conscience" or "and in order not to cause concerns about whether or not it is sinful"
Some translations put verse 28 and the first part of verse 29 in parentheses because the second part of verse 29 appears to give a reason for what Paul taught in verses 25-27 about not asking questions of conscience.
Here Paul explains whose conscience he was writing about in verse 28.
This is a rhetorical question, and it can be expressed as a statement. The verb "be judged" can be translated with an active form. Alternate translation: "For another person's conscience should not judge my freedom."
The abstract noun "freedom" can be expressed with the adjective "free." Alternate translation: "my being free" or "what I do because I am free"
The meaning of the abstract noun "gratitude" can be expressed with the phrase "give thanks." It can be made explicit that the thanksgiving is to God. Alternate translation: "If I give thanks to God for the food when I share in the meal"
This is a rhetorical question, and it can be expressed as a statement. The verb "be insulted" can be translated with an active form. Alternate translation: "I should not be insulted for that for which I gave thanks." or "People should not be insult me for eating food that I have thanked God for." (See: and )
This page has intentionally been left blank.
"Be blameless in the opinion of both Jews and Greeks, and of the church of God" or "Make sure that neither Jews nor Greeks nor the church of God can accuse you of doing wrong"
"make all people glad"
"I do not do things I desire for myself, but things that help as many people as possible"
2 Now I praise you because you remember me in everything. I praise you because you hold firmly to the traditions just as I delivered them to you. 3 Now I want you to understand that Christ is the head of every man, that a man is the head of a woman, and that God is the head of Christ. 4 Any man who prays or prophesies with his head covered dishonors his head. 5 But any woman who prays or prophesies with her head uncovered dishonors her head. For it is the same thing as if her head were shaved. 6 For if a woman will not cover her head, she should cut her hair short. If it is disgraceful for a woman to have her hair cut off or for her to shave her head, let her cover her head. 7 For a man should not have his head covered, since he is the image and glory of God. But the woman is the glory of the man. 8 For man was not made from woman. Instead, woman was made from man. 9 For neither was man created for woman. Instead, woman was created for man. 10 This is why the woman ought to have a symbol of authority on her head, because of the angels. 11 Nevertheless, in the Lord, the woman is not independent from the man, nor is the man independent from the woman. 12 For as the woman comes from the man, so does the man come from the woman. And all things come from God. 13 Judge for yourselves: Is it proper for a woman to pray to God with her head uncovered? 14 Does not even nature itself teach you that if a man has long hair, it is a dishonor for him? 15 Does not nature teach you that if a woman has long hair, it is her glory? For her hair has been given to her as a covering. 16 But if anyone wants to argue about this, we do not have any other practice, nor do the churches of God.
17 But in the following instructions, I do not praise you. For when you come together, it is not for the better but for the worse. 18 For in the first place, I hear that when you come together in the church, there are divisions among you, and in part I believe it. 19 For there must also be factions among you, so that those who are approved may become evident among you. 20 For when you come together, it is not the Lord's Supper that you eat. 21 When you eat, each one eats his own food before the others have their meal. One is hungry, and another becomes drunk. 22 Do you not have houses to eat and to drink in? Do you despise the church of God and humiliate those who have nothing? What should I say to you? Should I praise you? I will not praise you for this! 23 For I received from the Lord what I also passed on to you, that the Lord Jesus, on the night when he was betrayed, took bread. 24 After he had given thanks, he broke it and said, "This is my body, which is for you. Do this to remember me." 25 In the same way he took the cup after supper, and he said, "This cup is the new covenant in my blood. Do this as often as you drink it, to remember me." 26 For every time you eat this bread and drink this cup, you proclaim the Lord's death until he comes. 27 Whoever, therefore, eats the bread or drinks the cup of the Lord in an unworthy manner will be guilty of the body and the blood of the Lord. 28 Let a person examine himself first, and in this way let him eat of the bread and drink of the cup. 29 For he who eats and drinks without discerning the body eats and drinks judgment to himself. 30 That is why many among you are weak and ill, and some of you have fallen asleep. 31 But if we examine ourselves, we will not be judged. 32 But when we are judged by the Lord, we are disciplined, so that we may not be condemned along with the world. 33 Therefore, my brothers, when you come together to eat, wait for one another. 34 If anyone is hungry, let him eat at home, so that when you come together it will not be for judgment. And about the other things you wrote, I will give instructions when I come.
This is the beginning of a new section of the letter (Chapters 11-14). Paul now talks about proper church services. In this chapter, he deals with two different problems: women in the church services (verses 1-16) and the Lord's Supper (verses 17-34).
Paul's instructions here are debated among scholars. There may have been women who were abusing their Christian freedom and causing disorder in the church by going against established cultural customs. The disorder that their actions created would have caused him to be concerned.
There were problems in how the Corinthians were handling the Lord's Supper. They did not act in a unified manner. During the feast celebrated along with the Lord's Supper, some of them ate their own food without sharing. Some of them got drunk while the poor people remained hungry. Paul taught that the believers dishonored Christ's death if they participated in the Lord's Supper while they were sinning or while they were in broken relationships with each other. (See: sin and reconcile)
Paul uses rhetorical questions to scold the people for their unwillingness to follow the rules for worship he has suggested.
Paul uses "head" as a metonym for authority in verse 3 and also to refer to a person's actual head in verse 4 and following. Since the verses are so close together, it is likely that Paul intentionally used "head" in this way. This would show that the ideas in these verses are connected.
After reminding them to follow him in the same way that he follows Christ, Paul gives some specific instructions about how women and men are to live as believers.
"you think of me at all times" or "you always try act as I would want you to act" The Corinthians had not forgotten who Paul was or what he had taught them.
Paul speaks of the Corinthians believing what he taught them and obeying his commands as if he had given them a solid object that they were holding on to while someone tried to take it away. Alternate translation: "you believe and practice"
Possible meanings are 1) "Because of this, I want" or 2) "However, I want."
has authority over
Possible meanings are 1) "men are to have authority over women" or 2) "the husband is to have authority over the wife"
This means to have some kind of garment on his head that covers his hair.
Possible meanings are 1) "brings disgrace on himself" or 2) "brings disgrace on Christ, who is his head."
Possible meanings are 1) "woman who prays ... brings disgrace on herself" or 2) "wife who prays ... brings disgrace on her husband."
That is, without the cloth that was worn on the top of the head and that covered the hair and shoulders.
as if she had removed all the hair on her head with a razor
It was a mark of disgrace or humiliation for a woman to have her hair shaved off or cut short.
place on her head the cloth that was worn on the top of the head and that covered the hair and shoulders
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: Possible meanings are 1) "must not cover his head" or 2) "does not need to cover his head"
Just as man reflects God's greatness, the woman reflects the man's character.
God made the woman by taking a bone from the man and making the woman from that bone. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "God did not make the man from the woman. Instead, he made the woman from the man"
These words and all of 1 Corinthians 11:8 could be put in parentheses so that the reader can see that the word "this" in "this is why ... the angels" clearly refers back to the words "the woman is the glory of the man" in 1 Corinthians 11:7.
Possible meanings are 1) "to symbolize that she has man as her head" or 2) "to symbolize that she has the authority to pray or prophesy."
"While what I have just said is all true, the most important thing is this: in the Lord"
Possible meanings are 1) "among Christians, who belong to the Lord" or 2) "in the world as created by God."
This can be stated positively. Alternate translation: "the woman depends on the man, and the man depends on the woman"
This means that the first woman, Eve, was made from the rib of the first man, Adam, and since then all men have been born by women.
"God created everyone and everything" or "God created all"
"Judge this issue according to the local customs and church practices you know"
Paul expects the Corinthians to agree with him. This can be stated in active form. "To honor God as she prays to him, a woman should have a covering on her head."
Paul expects the Corinthians to agree with him. Alternate translation: "Nature itself even teaches you ... for him."
He is speaking of the way people in society normally act as if it were a person who teaches. Alternate translation: "You know just from looking at the way people normally act ... for him."
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "For God created woman with hair"
This page has intentionally been left blank.
As Paul talks about communion, the Lord's supper, he reminds them to have right attitudes as well as unity. He reminds them that if they fail in those things when taking communion, they will become sick and die, as has already happened to some of them.
Another possible meaning is "as I give you these instructions, there is something for which I cannot praise you: when"
"the instructions I am about to talk about"
"gather together" or "meet"
"you do not help each other; instead, you harm each other"
"as believers." Paul is not talking about being inside a building.
"you divide yourselves into opposing groups"
Possible meanings 1) Paul is being ironic to shame the Corinthians for dividing the people they thought were more important from those they thought were less important. Alternate translation: "For you seem to want to have factions among you so that everyone will know whom you consider to be most important" or 2) Paul means factions are necessary so that God can show those whom he approves. Alternate translation: "For it is necessary for there to be factions among you so that you will know which people God has approved"
opposing groups of people
"gather together"
"you may believe you are eating the Lord's Supper, but you are not, because you do not treat it with respect"
This page has intentionally been left blank.
"in which to gather for a meal"
hate or treat with dishonor and disrespect
embarrass or cause to feel shame
Paul is rebuking the Corinthians. Alternate translation: "I can say nothing good about this. I cannot praise you."
"For it was from the Lord that I heard what I told you, and it was this: the Lord"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "on the night that Judas Iscariot betrayed him"
"he pulled pieces from it"
"The bread I am holding is my body"
It is best to translate this literally. The Corinthians knew which cup he took, so it is not simply "a cup" or "some cup" or "any cup." Possible meanings are that it was 1) the cup of wine that one would expect him to use or 2) the third or fourth of the four cups of wine that the Jews drank at the Passover meal.
"Drink from this cup, and as often as you drink from it, remember me"
teach about the crucifixion and resurrection
Where Jesus comes to can be made explicit. Alternate translation: "until Jesus comes back to the earth"
"eats the bread of the Lord or drinks the cup of the Lord"
Paul speaks of a person looking at his relationship to God and how he has been living his life as if that person is looking over something he wants to buy. See how "test the quality" is translated in [1 Corinthians 3:13]
Possible meanings are 1) "and does not recognize that the church is the body of the Lord" or 2) "and does not consider that he is handling the Lord's body."
These words mean almost the same thing and can be combined, as in UDB.
"Sleep" here is a euphemism for death. Alternate translation: "and some of you have died" .
If this would sound like Paul is talking to those who have died, you may need to make explicit that he is not. Alternate translation: "some of the members of your group"
Paul speaks of a person looking at his relationship to God and how he has been living his life as if that person is looking over something he wants to buy. See how this is translated in [1 Corinthians 11:28]
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "God will not judge us"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "the Lord judges us, he disciplines us, so that he will not condemn us"
"allow the others to arrive before beginning the meal"
"let him eat before attending this gathering"
"it will not be an occasion for God to discipline you"
1 About spiritual gifts, brothers, I do not want you to be uninformed. 2 You know that when you were pagans, you were led astray to idols who could not speak, in whatever ways you were led by them. 3 Therefore I want you to know that no one who speaks by the Spirit of God can say, "Jesus is accursed." No one can say, "Jesus is Lord," except by the Holy Spirit.
4 Now there are different gifts, but the same Spirit. 5 There are different ministries, but the same Lord; 6 and there are different kinds of work, but it is the same God who works all in all. 7 Now to each one is given the outward display of the Spirit for the benefit of all. 8 For to one is given by the Spirit the word of wisdom, and to another the word of knowledge by the same Spirit. 9 To another is given faith by the same Spirit, and to another gifts of healing by the one Spirit. 10 To another is given miraculous works, and to another prophecy. To another is given the ability to distinguish between spirits, to another various kinds of tongues, and to another the interpretation of tongues. 11 All these are the work of one and the same Spirit, giving the gifts to each one individually, as he chooses.
12 For as the body is one and has many members and all are members of the same body, so it is with Christ. 13 For by one Spirit we were all baptized into one body, whether Jews or Greeks, whether slave or free, and all were made to drink of one Spirit. 14 For the body is not a single member, but many. 15 If the foot says, "Since I am not the hand, I am not part of the body," it is not any less a part of the body. 16 And if the ear says, "Because I am not an eye, I am not part of the body," it is not any less a part of the body. 17 If the whole body were an eye, where would the sense of hearing be? If the whole body were an ear, where would the sense of smell be? 18 But God has appointed each member, each one of them, into the body as he has desired. 19 If they were all the same member, where would the body be? 20 So now they are many members, but only one body. 21 The eye cannot say to the hand, "I have no need of you." Nor does the head say to the feet, "I have no need of you." 22 But the members of the body that appear to be weaker are essential, 23 and the parts of the body that we think are less honorable, we give them greater honor, and our unpresentable members have more dignity. 24 Now our presentable members have no such need. Rather, God has composed the body, giving greater honor to those members that lack it. 25 He did this so there may be no division within the body, but that the members should care for one another with the same affection. 26 So when one member suffers, all the members suffer together; or when one member is honored, all the members rejoice together. 27 Now you are the body of Christ and individually members of it. 28 And God has appointed in the church first apostles, second prophets, third teachers, then those who do miracles, then gifts of healing, those who provide helps, those who do the work of administration, and those who have various kinds of tongues. 29 Are all of them apostles? Are all prophets? Are all teachers? Do all do miracles? 30 Do all of them have gifts of healing? Do all of them speak with tongues? Do all of them interpret tongues? 31 Zealously seek the greater gifts. And now I will show you a more excellent way.
This chapter begins a new section. Chapters 12-14 discuss spiritual gifts within the church.
This is an important metaphor in Scripture. The church has many different parts. Each part has different functions. They combine to make one church. All of the different parts are necessary. Each part is to be concerned for all the other parts, even those that seem less important.
In reading the Old Testament, the Jews would have substituted the word "Lord" for the word "Yahweh." This sentence probably means that no one can say that Jesus is Yahweh, God in the flesh, without the Holy Spirit's influence drawing them to accept this truth. If this statement is translated poorly, it can have unintended theological consequences.
Paul lets the Corinthians know that God has given special gifts to believers. These gifts are to help the body of believers.
This can be stated as a positive. Alternate translation: "I want you to be informed"
Here "led astray" is a metaphor for being persuaded to do something wrong. Being led astray to idols represents being wrongly persuaded to worship idols. The phrases "were led astray" and "you were led by them" can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "you were persuaded in some way to worship idols who cannot speak" or "you believed lies somehow and so you worshiped idols who cannot speak"
Possible meanings are 1) "no Christian who has the Spirit of God in him can say" or 2) "no one who is prophesying by the power of the Spirit of God can say."
"God will punish Jesus" or "God will make Jesus suffer"
This double negative emphasizes that "by the Holy Spirit" is what makes it possible for one to say, "Jesus is Lord." Alternate translation: "One can say, 'Jesus is Lord,' only by the Holy Spirit"
"with the help of the Holy Spirit" or "by the power that the Holy Spirit gives him"
This page has intentionally been left blank.
This page has intentionally been left blank.
Possible meanings are 1) "makes active all the gifts in everyone who has received them" or 2) "works all things in all people."
This can be stated in active form. God is the one who does the giving
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "by means of the Spirit God gives to one person the word"
"the message"
God gives the gifts through the work of the Spirit.
The difference between these two words is not as important here as the fact that God gives them both by the same Spirit.
Paul is communicating one idea through two words. Alternate translation: "wise words"
Paul is communicating one idea through two words. Alternate translation: "words that show knowledge"
This can be stated in active form. See how this is translated in [1 Corinthians 12:8]
The words "are given" are understood from the previous phrase. Alternate translation: "to another gifts of healing by the one Spirit are given"
The phrase "is given by the same Spirit" is understood from the previous phrases. Alternate translation: "to another prophecy is given by the same Spirit"
The phrase "are given by the same Spirit" is understood from the previous phrases. Alternate translation: "to another various kinds of tongues are given by the same Spirit"
Here "tongues" represents languages. Alternate translation: "the ability to speak different languages"
The phrase "is given by the same Spirit" is understood from the previous phrases. Alternate translation: "to another the interpretation of tongues is given by the same Spirit"
This is the ability to listen to what someone says in one language and use another language to tell people what that person is saying. Alternate translation: "the ability to interpret what is said in other languages"
God gives the gifts through the work of the one and only Holy Spirit. See how this is translated in 1 Corinthians 12:8.
Paul continues to talk of the variety of gifts God gives believers. God gives different gifts to different believers, but Paul wants them to know that all believers are made into one body, which is called the body of Christ. For this reason believers should have unity.
Possible meanings are 1) the Holy Spirit is the one who baptizes us, "For one Spirit baptized us" or 2) that the Spirit, like the water of baptism, is the medium through which we are baptized into the body, "For in one Spirit we were all baptized"
This is a metaphor meaning everyone received and share in the same Spirit. The phrase "all were made" can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "God gave us all the same Spirit, which we share as people might share a drink"
This page has intentionally been left blank.
This page has intentionally been left blank.
This page has intentionally been left blank.
This can be made a statement. Alternate translation: "you could not hear anything. ... you could not smell anything."
This page has intentionally been left blank.
The word "member" is a general word for the parts of the body, like the head, arm, or knee. Alternate translation: "the same part of the body"
This can be made a statement. Alternate translation: "there would be no body."
This page has intentionally been left blank.
"I do not need you"
This page has intentionally been left blank.
"less important"
This probably refers to the private parts of the body, which people keep covered.
This page has intentionally been left blank.
"the body may be unified, and"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "someone gives honor to one member"
Here the word "now" is used to draw attention to the important point that follows.
Possible meanings for "first" are 1) the first in the list or 2) the most important in the list.
"those who provide help to other believers"
"those who govern the church"
Here "tongues" represents languages. Alternate translation: "those who have the ability to speak different languages"
Paul is reminding his readers of what they already know.
The answer Paul expects to all of these rhetorical questions is no. You may need to translate them as statements. Alternate translation: "Not all of them are apostles, are they? Not all are prophets, are they? Not all are teachers, are they? Not all do miracles, do they?" or "You and I all know that not all of them are apostles, not all are prophets, not all are teachers, and not all do powerful deeds."
This can be a statement. Alternate translation: "Not all of them have gifts of healing."
This can be a statement. Alternate translation: "Not all of them speak with tongues."
Here "tongues" represents languages. Alternate translation: "speak different languages"
This can be a statement. Alternate translation: "Not all of them interpret tongues."
Here "tongues" represents languages. To "interpret tongues" means to listen to what someone says in one language and use another language to tell people what that person is saying. Alternate translation: "interpret what is said in other languages"
Possible meanings are 1) "You must eagerly seek from God the gifts that best help the church." or 2) "You are eagerly looking for gifts that you think are greater because you think they are more exciting to have."
1 Suppose that I speak with the tongues of men and of angels. But if I do not have love, I have become a noisy gong or a clanging cymbal. 2 Suppose that I have the gift of prophecy and understand all hidden truths and knowledge, and that I have all faith so as to remove mountains. But if I do not have love, I am nothing. 3 Suppose that I give all my possessions to feed the poor, and that I give my body to be burned. But if I do not have love, I gain nothing. [1]4 Love is patient and kind. Love is not jealous and does not boast. It is not puffed up 5 or rude. It does not seek its own. It is not provoked, nor does it keep a count of wrongs. 6 It does not rejoice in unrighteousness. Instead, it rejoices in the truth. 7 Love bears all things, believes all things, hopes all things, and endures all things. 8 Love never ends. If there are prophecies, they will pass away. If there are tongues, they will cease. If there is knowledge, it will pass away. 9 For we know in part and we prophesy in part. 10 But when the perfect comes, that which is incomplete will pass away. 11 When I was a child, I spoke like a child, I thought like a child, I reasoned like a child. When I became an adult, I put away childish things. 12 For now we see indirectly in a mirror, but then face to face. Now I know in part, but then I will know fully just as I have been fully known. 13 But now these three remain: faith, hope, and love. But the greatest of these is love.
Paul seems to interrupt his teaching about spiritual gifts to speak about love.
Love is the most important characteristic of the believer. This chapter fully describes love. Paul tells why love is more important than the gifts of the Spirit. (See: love)
Paul uses many different metaphors in this chapter. He uses these metaphors to instruct the Corinthians, especially on difficult topics. Readers often need spiritual discernment to understand these teachings.
Having just talked about the gifts that God gives to believers, Paul emphasizes what is more important.
Possible meanings are 1) Paul is exaggerating for the sake of effect and does not believe that people speak the language that angels use or 2) Paul thinks that some who speak in tongues actually speak the language that angels use.
I have become like instruments that make loud, annoying sounds
a large, thin, round metal plate that is hit with a padded stick to make a loud, low-pitched sound
a thin, round metal plate that is hit with a padded stick to make a loud, high-pitched sound
This page has intentionally been left blank.
The phrase "to be burned" can be made active. Alternate translation: "I allow those who persecute me to burn me to death"
Paul describes the characteristics of love by speaking about love as if it were a person. Alternate translation: "Whoever loves is ... He is not ... He is not"
Paul continues to describe the characteristics of love by speaking about love as if it were a person. Alternate translation: "He does not ... He does not ... does he keep"
The word "seek" here means to desire and work for something. The person who loves wants and works for what is good for others as much as or more than what is good for himself.
"It does not become angry easily." The person who loves controls his anger.
The person who loves others does not keep a record of the wrongs that people have done to him.
Paul continues to describe the characteristics of love by speaking about love as if it were a person. Alternate translation: "He does not ... he rejoices"
This can be stated in positive form. Alternate translation: "rejoices only in righteousness and truth"
Paul continues speaking about love as if it were a person.
The phrase "all things" here appears to be an idiom meaning "always". Alternate translation: "always perseveres, always believes, always hopes, and always endures"
This means that whoever loves others always expects that what is good will happen.
This page has intentionally been left blank.
This page has intentionally been left blank.
This page has intentionally been left blank.
This page has intentionally been left blank.
Mirrors in Paul's day were made of polished metal rather than glass and provided a dim, vague reflection.
Possible meanings are 1) "now we see Christ" or 2) "now we see God."
The understood words "we will see" can be supplied. Seeing face to face is a metaphor or synecdoche for being physically present with the one we will see. Alternate translation: "but then we will see face to face"
The word "Christ" is understood. Alternate translation: "I will know Christ fully"
This can be stated as active. Alternate translation: "just as Christ has known me fully"
These abstract nouns can be expressed in phrases with verbs. Alternate translation: "we must trust the Lord, be confident that he will do what he has promised, and love him and others"
1 Pursue love and be zealous for spiritual gifts, especially that you may prophesy. 2 For the one who speaks in a tongue does not speak to people but to God. For no one understands him because he speaks mysteries in the Spirit. 3 But the one who prophesies speaks to people to build them up, to exhort them, and to comfort them. 4 The one who speaks in a tongue builds up himself, but the one who prophesies builds up the church. 5 Now I wish that you all spoke in tongues. But even more than that, I wish that you would prophesy. The one who prophesies is greater than the one who speaks in tongues (unless someone interprets so that the church may receive edification). 6 But now, brothers, if I come to you speaking in tongues, how will I benefit you? I cannot, unless I speak to you with revelation, or knowledge, or prophecy, or teaching. 7 In the same way, when lifeless instruments are producing sounds—like the flute or the harp—if they do not produce different tones, how will anyone know what tune the flute or harp is playing? 8 For if the trumpet is played with an uncertain sound, how will anyone know when it is time to prepare for battle? 9 It is the same way for you with the tongue. If you utter speech that is not clear, how will what is said be understood? You will be speaking into the air. 10 There are doubtless many kinds of languages in the world, and none is without meaning. 11 But if I do not know the meaning of a language, I will be a foreigner to the speaker, and the speaker will be a foreigner to me. 12 So it is with you. Since you are eager for the manifestations of the Spirit, seek for the edification of the church so that you might abound. 13 So the one who speaks in a tongue should pray that he may interpret. 14 For if I pray in a tongue, my spirit prays, but my mind is unfruitful. 15 What am I to do? I will pray with my spirit, but I will also pray with my mind. I will sing with my spirit, and I will also sing with my mind. 16 Otherwise, if you bless God with the spirit, how will the outsider say "Amen" when you are giving thanks if he does not know what you are saying? 17 For you certainly give thanks well enough, but the other person is not built up. 18 I thank God that I speak in tongues more than all of you. 19 But in the church I would rather speak five words with my understanding so that I might instruct others, than ten thousand words in a tongue.
20 Brothers, do not be children in your thinking. Rather, in regard to evil, be like infants. But in your thinking be mature. 21 In the law it is written,
"By men of strange tongues
and by the lips of strangers
I will speak to this people.
Even then they will not hear me,"
says the Lord.
22 So then, tongues are a sign, not to believers, but to unbelievers. But prophecy is for a sign, not for unbelievers, but for believers. 23 If, therefore, the whole church comes together and all speak in tongues, and outsiders and unbelievers come in, would they not say that you are insane? 24 But if you all were prophesying and an unbeliever or an outsider came in, he would be convicted by all he hears. He would be judged by all that is said. 25 The secrets of his heart would be revealed. As a result, he would fall on his face and worship God. He would declare that God is really among you.
26 What is next then, brothers? When you come together, each one has a psalm, a teaching, a revelation, a tongue, or an interpretation. Do everything so that you build up the church. 27 If anyone speaks in a tongue, let there be two or at most three, and each one in turn, and then someone should interpret what is said. 28 But if there is no one to interpret, let each of them keep silent in the church. Let each one speak to himself alone and to God. 29 Let two or three prophets speak, and let the others listen with discernment to what is said. 30 But if there is a revelation to one who is sitting, let the first be silent. 31 For each of you can prophesy one by one so that each one may learn and all may be exhorted. 32 For the spirits of the prophets are subject to the prophets. 33 For God is not a God of confusion, but of peace.
This is the rule in all the churches of God's holy people. 34 The women should keep silent in the churches. For they are not permitted to speak. Instead, they should be in submission, as also the law says. 35 If there is anything they desire to learn, let them ask their husbands at home. For it is disgraceful for a woman to speak in the church. 36 Did the word of God come from you? Are you the only ones it has reached?
37 If anyone thinks himself to be a prophet or spiritual, he should acknowledge that the things I write to you are a command of the Lord. 38 But if anyone does not recognize this, let him not be recognized.
39 So then, brothers, earnestly desire to prophesy, and do not forbid anyone from speaking in tongues. 40 But let all things be done properly and in order.
In this chapter, Paul returns to discussing spiritual gifts.
Some translations set what is quoted from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULB does this with the words of verse 21.
Scholars disagree on the exact meaning of the gift of tongues. Paul describes the gift of tongues as a sign for unbelievers. It does not serve the whole church, unless someone interprets what is spoken. It is very important that the church uses this gift properly.
Scholars disagree on the exact meaning of prophecy as a spiritual gift. Paul says prophets can build up the entire church. He describes prophecy as a gift for believers. (See: prophet)
Paul wants the Corinthians to know that though teaching is more important because it instructs people, it must be done with love.
Paul speaks of love as if it were a person. Alternate translation: "Follow after love" or "Work hard to love people"
"and work especially hard to be able to prophesy"
Possible meanings are 1) the person speaks by the power of the Holy Spirit or 2) he speaks in his own spirit.
Building people up represents helping them become mature and strong in their faith. See how you translated "builds up" in [1 Corinthians 8:1]
or "to encourage them"
Building people up represents helping them become mature and strong in their faith. See how you translated "builds up" in [1 Corinthians 8:1]
Here "tongues" represents languages. Alternate translation: "had the ability to speak different languages"
Paul is emphasizing that the gift of prophecy is greater than the gift of speaking in tongues. Alternate translation: "The one who prophesies has a greater gift"
This means to listen to what someone says in one language and use another language to tell people what that person is saying.
The abstract noun "edification" can be translated using the verb "edify," which means to build something up. This is a metonym for the words through which the people in the church learn God's word and love God more, and the word "church" here is a metonym for the people who make up the church. Alternate translation: "the people in the church may become stronger" or "the one who prophesies may help the people know and love God better"
This can be a statement. Alternate translation: "I will not benefit you." or "I will not have done anything that helps you."
This refers to sounds of different pitch that make up the melody, not to the difference between a flute sound and a harp sound.
Paul wants the Corinthians to answer this themselves. Alternate translation: "no one will know what tune the flute or harp is playing."
melody or song
Paul wants the Corinthians to answer this themselves. Alternate translation: "no one would know when it is time to prepare for battle."
or "you. If with the tongue you utter speech"
The word "tongue" here is a synecdoche for all the parts of the body which a person uses in order to speak.
Clear speech is language that people can understand. Paul was talking about people speaking in other languages during church services. Alternate translation: "If you speak in a language that people do not know"
These passive clauses can be translated in active form. Alternate translation: "how will anyone understand what you have said"
This can be stated as a positive. Alternate translation: "they all have meaning"
This page has intentionally been left blank.
All instances of "you" and the imperatives are plural.
"to do things that show that the Spirit controls you"
Some modern translations read, "seek that you might abound in those things that edify the church." Paul speaks of the church as if it were a house that one could build. Alternate translation: "try to succeed greatly in making God's people more able to serve God so that things will go well with you"
This means to listen to what someone says in one language and use another language to tell people what that person is saying.
The mind not understanding what is being prayed and, therefore, receiving no benefit from the prayer is spoken of as if the "mind is unfruitful." Alternate translation: "I do not understand it in my mind" or "my mind does not benefit from the prayer, because I do not understand the words I am saying"
Paul is introducing his conclusion. Alternate translation: "This is what I will do."
Prayers and songs must be in a language that the people present can understand.
"with words that I understand"
Though "you" is singular here, Paul is addressing everyone who prays only in the spirit, but not with the mind.
This can be a statement. Alternate translation: "the outsider will never be able to say 'Amen' ... saying."
Possible meanings are 1) "another person" or 2) "people who are new to your group."
"agree"
Paul is speaking to the Corinthians as if they were one person, so the word "you" here is singular.
Building people up represents helping them become mature and strong in their faith. This can be stated in active form. See how you translated "builds up" in [1 Corinthians 8:1]
Here "tongues" represents languages. Alternate translation: "I speak different languages"
Paul was not counting words, but used exaggeration to emphasize that a few understandable words are far more valuable than even a great number of words in a language that people cannot understand. Also, here "tongue" represents a language. Alternate translation: "10,000 words in a different language" or "a great many words in a different language"
Paul tells the Corinthians that people being able to speak in different languages was told ahead of time by the prophet Isaiah, many years before such speaking happened at the start of Christ's church.
Here "children" is a metaphor for being spiritually immature. Alternate translation: "do not think like children"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "The prophet wrote these words in the law:"
These two phrases mean basically the same thing and are used together for emphasis.
Paul gives specific instructions about an orderly way to use gifts in the church.
"sign only for believers"
This can be a statement. Alternate translation: "they would say that you are insane."
Paul says basically the same thing twice for emphasis. Alternate translation: "he would realize that he is guilty of sin because he hears what you are saying"
Here "heart" is a metonym for a person's thoughts. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "God would reveal to him the secrets of his heart" or "He would recognize his own private inner thoughts"
"Fall on his face" here is an idiom, meaning to bow down. Alternate translation: "He would bow down and worship God"
Paul uses a question to introduce the next part of his message. Alternate translation: "Because everything I have just told you is true, this is what you need to do, my fellow believers."
This is the ability to listen to what someone says in one language and use another language to tell people what that person is saying.
Here "tongue" represents a language. Alternate translation: "speaks in a different languages"
"and they should speak one after another" or "and they should speak one at a time"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "interpret what they said"
This means to listen to what someone says in one language and use another language to tell people what that person is saying.
This page has intentionally been left blank.
Possible meanings are 1) only two or three prophets speak at any one meeting or 2) only two or three prophets take turns speaking at any one time.
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "to what they say"
"God reveals something" or "God speaks"
"to one of the people sitting there listening to the prophets"
the person who has been speaking
Only one person should prophesy at a time.
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "you may exhort all"
This page has intentionally been left blank.
God does not create confusing situations by making people all speak at the same time.
Possible meanings are 1) stop speaking, 2) stop speaking when someone is prophesying, or 3) be absolutely silent during the church service.
This page has intentionally been left blank.
Paul emphasizes that the Corinthians are not the only ones who understand what God wants Christians to do. Alternate translation: "The word of God did not come from you in Corinth; you are not the only people who understand God's will."
"Word of God" here is a metonym for the message from God. Alternate translation: "God's message"
A true prophet or truly spiritual person will accept Paul's writings as coming from the Lord.
"if anyone ignores this, let him be ignored"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "you should not recognize him"
Paul makes it clear that speaking in tongues at a church gathering is permissible and acceptable.
Paul is stressing that church gatherings should be held in an orderly manner. Alternate translation: "But do all things properly and in order" or "But do everything in an orderly, appropriate way"
1 Now I want to make known to you, brothers, the gospel I proclaimed to you, which you received and on which you stand, 2 and by which you are being saved, if you hold firmly to the word I preached to you, unless you believed in vain. 3 For I delivered to you as of first importance what I also received, that Christ died for our sins according to the scriptures, 4 that he was buried, and that he was raised on the third day according to the scriptures. 5 Christ appeared to Cephas, and then to the twelve; 6 then he appeared to more than five hundred brothers at once. Most of them are still alive, but some have fallen asleep. 7 Then he appeared to James, then to all the apostles. 8 Last of all, he appeared to me, as if to one born prematurely. 9 For I am the least of the apostles. I am unworthy to be called an apostle because I persecuted the church of God. 10 But by the grace of God I am what I am, and his grace in me was not in vain. Instead, I labored harder than all of them. Yet it was not I, but the grace of God that is with me. 11 Therefore whether it is I or they, so we preach and so you believed.
12 Now if Christ is proclaimed as raised from the dead, how can some of you say there is no resurrection of the dead? 13 But if there is no resurrection of the dead, then not even Christ has been raised; 14 and if Christ has not been raised, then our preaching is in vain, and your faith also is in vain. 15 Also, we are found to be false witnesses about God, because we testified that God raised Christ from the dead. But he did not raise him, if indeed the dead are not raised. 16 For if the dead are not raised, not even Christ has been raised; 17 and if Christ has not been raised, your faith is in vain and you are still in your sins. 18 Then those who have fallen asleep in Christ have also perished. 19 If only in this life we hope in Christ, of all people we are most to be pitied.
20 But now Christ has been raised from the dead as the firstfruits of those who sleep. 21 For since death came by a man, by a man also came the resurrection of the dead. 22 For as in Adam all die, so also in Christ all will be made alive. 23 But each in his own order: Christ, who is the firstfruits, and then those who belong to Christ will be made alive at his coming. 24 Then will be the end, when he will hand over the kingdom to God the Father, when he will abolish all rule and all authority and power. 25 For he must reign until he has put all his enemies under his feet. 26 The last enemy to be destroyed is death. 27 For "he has put everything under his feet." But when it says "he has put everything," it is clear that this does not include the one who put everything in subjection under him. 28 When all things are subjected under him, then the Son himself will be subjected under the one who put all things into subjection under him, that God may be all in all.
29 Or else what will those do who are baptized for the dead? If the dead are not raised at all, why are they baptized for them? 30 Why then are we in danger every hour? 31 I die every day! This is as sure as my boasting in you, which I have in Christ Jesus our Lord. 32 What do I gain, from a human point of view, if I fought with beasts at Ephesus, if the dead are not raised?
"Let us eat and drink,
for tomorrow we die."
33 Be not deceived: "Bad company corrupts good morals." 34 Sober up! Live righteously! Do not keep sinning. For some of you have no knowledge of God. I say this to your shame.
35 But someone will say, "How are the dead raised, and with what kind of body will they come?" 36 You fool! What you sow will not come to life unless it dies. 37 What you sow is not the body that will be, but a bare grain. It may become wheat or something else. 38 But God will give it a body as he chooses, and to each seed its own body. 39 Not all flesh is the same. Instead, there is one flesh for human beings, and another flesh for animals, and another flesh for birds, and another for fish. 40 There are also heavenly bodies and earthly bodies. But the glory of the heavenly body is one kind and the glory of the earthly is another. 41 There is one glory of the sun, and another glory of the moon, and another glory of the stars. For one star differs from another star in glory. 42 So also is the resurrection of the dead. What is sown is perishable, and what is raised is imperishable. 43 It is sown in dishonor; it is raised in glory. It is sown in weakness; it is raised in power. 44 It is sown a natural body; it is raised a spiritual body. If there is a natural body, there is also a spiritual body. 45 So also it is written, "The first man Adam became a living soul." The last Adam became a life-giving spirit. 46 But the spiritual did not come first but the natural, and then the spiritual. 47 The first man is of the earth, made of dust. The second man is from heaven. 48 Just as the one made from dust is, so also are those who are made of the dust, and as the man of heaven is, so also are those who are of heaven. 49 Just as we have borne the image of the man of dust, we will also bear the image of the man of heaven.
50 Now this I say, brothers, that flesh and blood cannot inherit the kingdom of God. Neither does what is perishable inherit what is imperishable. 51 Look! I tell you a mystery: We will not all sleep, but we will all be changed. 52 We will be changed in a moment, in the twinkling of an eye, at the last trumpet. For the trumpet will sound, and the dead will be raised imperishable, and we will be changed. 53 For this perishable body must put on what is imperishable, and this mortal body must put on immortality. 54 But when this perishable body has put on what is imperishable, and when this mortal body has put on immortality, then will come about the saying that is written, "Death is swallowed up in victory."
55 "Death, where is your victory?
Death, where is your sting?"
56 The sting of death is sin, and the power of sin is the law. 57 But thanks be to God, who gives us the victory through our Lord Jesus Christ! 58 Therefore, my dear brothers, be steadfast and immovable. Always abound in the work of the Lord, because you know that your labor in the Lord is not in vain.
This chapter includes a very important teaching about the resurrection of Jesus. The Greek people did not believe that people could live after they died. Paul defends the resurrection of Jesus. He teaches why it is important to all believers. (See: resurrection and believe)
Paul presents the resurrection as the ultimate proof that Jesus is God. Christ is the first of many whom God will raise to life. The resurrection is central to the gospel. Few doctrines are as important as this one. (See: goodnews and raise)
Paul uses many different figures of speech in this chapter. He uses them to express difficult theological teachings in a way that people can understand.
Paul reminds the Corinthians that it is the gospel that saves them and he tells them again what the gospel is. Then he gives them a short history lesson which ends with what will yet happen.
Possible meanings are 1) Paul wants to remind them by making the gospel known again, "help you remember, brothers, the gospel" or 2) he wants to make sure they understand the gospel, "make clear to you, brothers, the gospel."
Paul is speaking of the Corinthians as if they were a house and the gospel as if it were the foundation on which the house was standing.
This can be stated in active form. "God will save you"
"the message I preached to you"
Possible meanings are 1) as the most important of many things or 2) as the first in time of important things.
"to pay for our sins" or "so that God could forgive our sins"
"just as the propets predicted in the scriptures." Here "scriptures" means the Old Testament.
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "they buried him"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "God raised him"
"was caused to live again"
"showed himself to"
The information that is understood here can be included. Alternate translation: "and then he appeared to the twelve disciples"
Paul used the term "the twelve" to mean the original disciples, known as apostles, that followed Jesus. Although, when Jesus appeared to the apostles, Judas had already died, Paul still refers to the groups as "twelve." Alternate translation: "to the rest of the apostles"
500
"Sleep" here is a common euphemism for death. Alternate translation: "some have died"
This page has intentionally been left blank.
"Finally, after he had appeared to the others"
This is a simile, but its meaning is unclear. These words could refer to 1) a baby that is born unexpectedly early, in which case Paul means that he was unexpectedly called to be an apostle, or 2) a baby who is born early and is very small, in which case Paul means that he had not learned from Christ and grown spiritually as the other apostles had, or 3) a baby who is born dead, in which case Paul means that Christ appeared to him when he was spiritually dead.
"a baby born too early"
This page has intentionally been left blank.
God's grace or kindness has made Paul as he is now.
Paul is emphasizing through litotes that God worked through Paul. Alternate translation: "because he was kind to me, I was able to do much good work"
Paul speaks of the work he was able to do because God was kind to him as if grace were actually doing the work. Alternate translation: Possible meanings are 1) this is literally true, and God actually did the work and kindly used Paul as a tool or 2) Paul is using a metaphor and saying that God was kind to let Paul do the work and to make Paul's work have good results.
This page has intentionally been left blank.
Paul is using this question to begin a new topic. Alternate translation: "you should not be saying that there is no resurrection of the dead!"
made alive again
Paul uses this statement to argue that there is a resurrection of the dead. He knows that Christ has been raised and so infers that all who die will be resurrected. To say that there is no resurrection is to say that Christ has not been raised, but this is false because Paul has seen the resurrected Christ
This can be translated in active form. Alternate translation: "God has not raised even Christ"
This page has intentionally been left blank.
Paul wants to assure the Corinthians that Christ rose from the dead.
Paul is arguing that if Christ did not rise from the dead, then they are bearing false witness or lying about Christ's coming alive again.
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "everyone will realize that we are"
This page has intentionally been left blank.
Their faith is based on Christ having risen from the dead, so if that did not happen, their faith will do them no good.
This page has intentionally been left blank.
Here to hope in Christ is to confidently expect good from him. Alternate translation: "If only in this life we can confidently expect Christ to help us" or "If we can trust in Christ to save us only in this life"
"people should feel sorry for us more than they do for anyone else"
"as it is, Christ" or "this is the truth: Christ"
"Raised" here is an idiom for "caused to live again." This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "God has raised Christ from the dead"
Here "firstfruits" is a metaphor, comparing Christ to the first of the harvest, which would be followed by the rest of the harvest. Christ was the first to be raised from the dead, and all who believe in him will also be raised from the dead. Alternate translation: "dead, like the first part of the harvest" or "dead; he is like the first part of the harvest"
Sleep here is a euphemism for death. Alternate translation: "those who have died"
The abstract noun "death" can be expressed with the verb "die." Alternate translation: "people die because of what one man did"
The abstract noun "resurrection" can be expressed with the verb "raise." Alternate translation: "people are raised from the dead because of another man" or "people will become alive again because of what one man did"
This page has intentionally been left blank.
Here "firstfruits" is a metaphor, comparing Christ to the first of the harvest, which would be followed by the rest of the harvest. Christ was the first to be raised from the dead. Alternate translation: "who is like the first part of the harvest"
Here the word "he" refers to Christ.
"he will stop those people who rule, who have authority, and who have power, from doing what they are doing"
Possible meanings are 1) all occurrences of "he" and "his" refer to Christ or 2) "For Christ must reign until God the Father has put all Christ's enemies under Christ's feet"
Kings who won wars would put their feet on the necks of those whom they had defeated to their power over their enemies. Alternate translation: "until he has put all his enemies under his power"
Paul speaks of death here as if it were a person who will be killed. The passive verb can be stated as active. Possible meanings are 1) Christ will destroy death or 2) God the Father will destroy death. Alternate translation: "The final enemy that he will destroy is death itself"
Possible meanings are 1) "God the Father has put everything under Christ's feet" or 2) "Christ has put everything under his own feet"
Kings who won wars would put their feet on the necks of those whom they had defeated to show they have power over their enemies. See how "put ... under his feet" is translated in [1 Corinthians 15:25]
"this does not include God the Father, who put everything in subjection under the Son"
This can stated as active. Alternate translation: "God the Father has made all things subject to the Son"
This can stated as active. Alternate translation: "the Son himself will become subject"
In the previous verses he was referred to as "Christ." Alternate translation: "Christ, that is, the Son himself,"
This is an important title that describes the relationship between Jesus and God.
Paul uses this question to teach the Corinthians. It can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "Otherwise it would be useless for Christians to receive baptism for the dead."
Paul uses this question to argue that the dead are raised. Apparently some people, probably some members of the church in Corinth, were being baptized for the dead. Paul infers that those people did so because they believed that the dead would be raised.
This can be translated in active form. Alternate translation: "If God does not raise the dead at all"
"are not caused to live again"
Paul uses this question to teach the Corinthians. It can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "there would be no reason for them to have people baptize them on behalf of dead people."
Paul uses this question to teach the Corinthians. The reason he and others were in danger is that some people were angry that they taught that Jesus will raise people from death. Alternate translation: "If people will not rise from the dead, we gain nothing by being in danger every hour for teaching that people will rise."
This exaggeration means he was in danger of dying. He knew that some people wanted to kill him because they did not like what he was teaching. Alternate translation: "Every day I am in danger of dying" or "Every day I risk my life!"
Paul uses this statement as evidence that he faces death every day. Alternate translation: "You can know that this is true, because you know about my boasting in you" or "You can know that this is true, because you know about how much I boast in you"
Paul boasted in them because of what Christ Jesus had done for them. Alternate translation: "my boasting in you, which I do because of what Christ Jesus our Lord has done for you"
"the way I tell other people how good you are"
Paul wants the Corinthians to understand without him having to tell them. This can be a statement. Alternate translation: "I gained nothing ... by fighting with beasts at Ephesus ... not raised."
Paul is referring to something that he actually did. Possible meanings are 1) Paul was speaking figuratively about his arguments with learned pagans or other conflicts with people who wanted to kill him or 2) he was actually put into the arena to fight against dangerous animals.
Paul concludes that if there is no further life after death, it is better for us to enjoy this life as we can, for tomorrow our life will end without any further hope.
If you live with bad people, you will act like them. Paul is quoting a common saying.
"You must think seriously about this"
Paul gives some specifics about how the resurrection of the believers' bodies will take place. He gives a picture of natural and spiritual bodies (15:36-44) and compares the first man Adam with the last Adam, Christ (15:45-49).
Possible meanings are 1) The person is asking sincerely or 2) the person is using the question to mock the idea of a resurrection. Alternate translation: "But some will say that they cannot imagine how God will raise the dead, and what kind of body God would give them in the resurrection."
"someone will ask"
That is, will it be a physical body or a spiritual body? What shape will the body have? What will the body be made of? Translate using the most general question that someone who wants to know the answers to these questions would ask.
Paul is speaking to the Corinthians as if they were one person, so both instances of "you" here are singular.
"unthinking person." Paul is accusing them of not thinking carefully, He is not accusing them of moral error.
A seed will not grow unless it is first buried underground. In the same way, a person has to die before God can resurrect him.
Paul uses the metaphor of the seed again to say that God will resurrect the dead body of the believer, but that body will not appear as it was.
Paul is speaking to the Corinthians as if they were one person, so the word "you" here is singular.
"God will decide what kind of body it will have"
"Not all kinds of bodies are the same ... there is one kind of body ... another kind of body"
"bodies in the sky"
"bodies on the earth." This refers to the kinds of bodies mentioned in 15:41.
"the glory that the bodies in the sky have is different from the glory that the bodies on the earth have"
Possible meanings are 1) "brightness" or "radiance" or 2) "beauty" or "splendor"
This page has intentionally been left blank.
The writer speaks of a person's body being buried as if it were a seed that is planted in the ground. And he speaks of a person's body being raised from the dead as if it were a plant growing from the seed. The passive verbs can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "What goes into the ground ... what comes out of the ground" or "What people bury ... what God raises"
"is caused to live again"
"can rot ... cannot rot"
The writer speaks of a person's body being buried as if it were a seed that is planted in the ground. And he speaks of a person's body being raised from the dead as if it were a plant growing from the seed. The passive verbs can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "It goes into the ground ... it comes out of the ground" or "People bury it ... God raises it"
The writer speaks of a person's body being buried as if it were a seed that is planted in the ground. And he speaks of a person's body being raised from the dead as if it were a plant growing from the seed. The passive verbs can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "It goes into the ground ... it comes out of the ground" or "People bury it ... God raises it"
This page has intentionally been left blank.
"The natural being came first. The spiritual being is from God and came later."
created by earthly processes, not yet connected to God
God made the first man, Adam, from the dust of the earth.
dirt
Jesus Christ
"those who belong to God"
"we have been just like the man of dust, we will also be just like the man of heaven"
Paul wants the Corinthians to realize that some believers will not die physically but will still get a resurrected body through Christ's victory.
Possible meanings are 1) the two sentences mean the same thing. Alternate translation: "human beings who will surely die cannot inherit the permanent kingdom of God" or 2) the second sentence finishes the thought begun by the first. Alternate translation: "weak human beings cannot inherit the kingdom of God. Neither can those who will certainly die inherit a kingdom that will last forever"
Those who inhabit a body that is doomed to die.
Receiving what God has promised believers is spoken of as if property and wealth were being inherited from a family member.
"can rot ... cannot rot." See how these words are translated in 1 Corinthians 15:42.
We will not all sleep
Sleep here is a euphemism for death. Alternate translation: "We will not all die"
This can be stated as active. Alternate translation: "God will change us all"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "God will change us"
It will happen as fast as it takes for a person to blink his or her eye.
"when the last trumpet sounds"
This can be translated in active form. Alternate translation: "God will raise the dead"
"caused to live again"
"in a form that cannot rot." See how a similar phrase is translated in 1 Corinthians 15:42.
"this body that can rot ... cannot rot." See how similar phrases are translated in 1 Corinthians 15:42.
Paul is speaking of God making our bodies so they will never die again as if God were putting new clothes on us.
Here the body is spoken of as if it were a person, and becoming imperishable is spoken of as if being imperishable were clothing that a body would wear. Alternate translation: "when this perishable body has become imperishable" or "when this body that can rot can no longer rot"
Here the body is spoken of as if it were a person, and becoming immortal is spoken of as if being immortal was clothing that a body would wear. Alternate translation: "when this mortal body has become immortal" or "when this body that can die can no longer die"
Paul speaks as if death were a person, and he uses this question to mock the power of death, which Christ has defeated. Alternate translation: "Death has no victory. Death has no sting."
These are singular.
It is through sin that we are destined to face death, that is, to die.
God's law that was passed down by Moses defines sin and shows us how we sin before God.
"has defeated death for us"
Paul wants believers, while they work for the Lord, to remember the changed, resurrected bodies that God is going to give them.
Paul speaks of someone who lets nothing stop him from doing what he has decided to do as if he could not be physically moved. Alternate translation: "be determined"
Paul speaks of efforts made in working for the Lord as if they were objects that a person could acquire more of. Alternate translation: "Always work for the Lord faithfully"
1 Now concerning the collection for God's holy people: as I instructed the churches of Galatia, so you are to do. 2 On the first day of the week, each of you is to put something aside and store it up as he may prosper. Do this so that there will be no collections when I come. 3 When I arrive, to whomever you approve, I will give letters of introduction to them and will send them with your gift to Jerusalem. 4 If it is appropriate for me to go also, they will go with me. 5 But I will come to you when I pass through Macedonia. For I will pass through Macedonia. 6 Perhaps I may stay with you or even spend the winter, so that you may help me on my way, wherever I go. 7 For I do not wish to see you now for only a passing visit. For I hope to spend more time with you, if the Lord permits. 8 But I will stay in Ephesus until Pentecost, 9 for a wide door has opened for me, and there are many adversaries.
10 Now when Timothy comes, see that he is with you unafraid, for he is laboring at the work of the Lord, as I am doing. 11 Let no one despise him. Help him on his way in peace, so that he may come to me. For I am expecting him to come along with the brothers. 12 Now concerning our brother Apollos, I strongly encouraged him to visit you with the brothers. But it was not at all his will that he come now. However, he will come when the time is right.
13 Be watchful, stand fast in the faith, act like men, be strong. 14 Let all that you do be done in love.
15 You know the household of Stephanas, that they were the firstfruits of Achaia, and that they have devoted themselves to the service of God's holy people. Now I urge you, brothers, 16 to be in submission to such people and to everyone who helps in the work and labors with us. 17 I rejoice at the coming of Stephanas, Fortunatus, and Achaicus. They have made up for your absence. 18 For they have refreshed my spirit and yours. So then, acknowledge people like them.
19 The churches of Asia send greetings to you. Aquila and Priscilla greet you in the Lord, with the church that is in their home. 20 All the brothers greet you. Greet one another with a holy kiss.
21 I, Paul, write this with my own hand. 22 If anyone does not love the Lord, may he be accursed. Our Lord, come! 23 The grace of the Lord Jesus be with you. 24 My love be with you all in Christ Jesus. [1]
Paul briefly covers many topics in this chapter. It was common in the ancient Near East for the last part of letters to have personal greetings.
Paul gives practical instructions to help prepare the Corinthian church for his visit. He tells them to start collecting money every Sunday for the believers in Jerusalem. He hopes to come and spend the winter with them. He tells them to help Timothy when he comes. He had hopes Apollos would go to them, but Apollos did not think it was the right time. Paul also tells them to obey Stephanus. Finally, he sends his greetings to everyone.
In his closing notes, Paul reminds the Corinthian believers to collect money for the needy believers in Jerusalem.
Paul was collecting money from his churches for the poor Jewish Christians in Jerusalem and Judea.
Possible meanings are: 1) "keep it at home" or 2) "leave it with the church"
"according to how he prospers" or "according to how much he earns"
"so that you will not have to collect more money while I am with you"
Some modern translations read, "to whomever you have approved by letter of introduction, I will send"
This page has intentionally been left blank.
This page has intentionally been left blank.
This means they might give Paul money or other things he needs so that he and his ministry team could continue to travel.
Paul wanted to see the believers in Corinth, but he did not know if he actually would be able to do that. Alternate translation: "I expect to spend more time with you, if the Lord permits" or "I plan to spend more time with you, if the Lord permits"
Paul would stay in Ephesus until this festival, which comes in May or June, 50 days after Passover. He would then travel through Macedonia, and later try to arrive in Corinth before winter started.
Paul speaks of the opportunity God has given him to win people to the gospel as if it were a door that God had opened so he could walk through it.
"Now" here marks a change in topic. Here Paul begins to talk about Timothy's visit to Corinth.
"see that he has no cause to fear being with you"
Because Timothy was much younger than Paul, sometimes he was not shown the respect he deserved as a minister of the gospel.
Here the word "our" refers to Paul and his readers, so it is inclusive.
Paul is describing what he wants the Corinthians to do as if he were giving four commands to soldiers in war. These four commands mean almost the same thing and are used for emphasis.
Paul speaks of people being aware of what is happening as if they were guards keeping watch over a city or vineyard. This can be stated more clearly. Alternate translation: "Be careful whom you trust" or "Watch out for danger"
Paul speaks of people continuing to believe in Christ according to his teaching as if they were soldiers refusing to retreat when the enemy attacks. Possible meanings are 1) "keep strongly believing what we have taught you" or 2) "keep strongly trusting in Christ"
In the society in which Paul and his audience lived, men usually provided for families by doing the heavy work and fighting against invaders. This can be stated more clearly. Alternate translation: "be responsible"
"Everything you do should show people that you love them"
Paul begins to close his letter and sends greetings from other churches, as well as from Prisca, Aquila, and Paul himself.
Stephanas was one of the first believers in the church at Corinth.
"the first people in Achaia to believe in Christ"
This is the name of a province in Greece.
This page has intentionally been left blank.
These men were either some of the first Corinthian believers or church elders who were co-workers with Paul.
These are men's names.
"They made up for the fact that you were not here."
Paul is saying he was encouraged by their visit.
The word "acknowledge" here might be an understatement. Paul wants the Corinthians to honor Stephanas, Fortunatus, and Achaicus
This page has intentionally been left blank.
This page has intentionally been left blank.
Paul was making it clear that the instructions in this letter are from him, even though one of his co-laborers wrote what Paul was saying in the rest of the letter. Paul wrote this last part with his own hand.
"may God curse him." See how "accursed" was translated in 1 Corinthians 12:3.
This page has intentionally been left blank.
This page has intentionally been left blank.
1 Paul, an apostle of Christ Jesus through the will of God, and Timothy our brother,
2 to God's holy people and faithful brothers in Christ who are at Colossae. May grace be to you, and peace from God our Father. [1]
3 We give thanks to God, the Father of our Lord Jesus Christ, and we always pray for you. 4 We have heard of your faith in Christ Jesus and of the love that you have for all God's holy people, 5 because of the hope reserved for you in heaven, which you heard about in the word of truth, the gospel 6 which has come to you. In the same way this gospel is bearing fruit and is growing in all the world—just as it has been doing among you since the day you heard it and understood the grace of God in truth. 7 This is the gospel as you learned it from Epaphras, our beloved fellow servant, who is a faithful servant of Christ on our behalf. [2]8 Epaphras has made known to us your love in the Spirit.
9 Because of this love, from the day we heard this we have not stopped praying for you. We pray that you will be filled with the knowledge of his will in all wisdom and spiritual understanding, 10 so that you will walk in a manner that is worthy of the Lord and that pleases him in every way: by bearing fruit in every good work and growing in the knowledge of God, 11 by being strengthened with all power, according to his glorious might, so that you may have great endurance and patience, and by joyfully 12 giving thanks to the Father, who made you able [3] to have a share in the inheritance of God's holy people in light. 13 He has rescued us from the dominion of darkness and transferred us to the kingdom of his beloved Son, 14 in whom we have redemption, the forgiveness of sins. [4]15 He is the image of the invisible God, the firstborn of all creation. 16 For in him all things were created, those in the heavens and those on the earth, the visible and the invisible things. Whether thrones or dominions or governments or authorities, all things were created through him and for him. 17 He himself is before all things, and in him all things hold together. 18 He is the head of the body, the church. He is the beginning, the firstborn from among the dead, so he has first place among all things. 19 For God was pleased to have all his fullness dwell in the Son, 20 and through the Son to reconcile all things to himself, having made peace through the blood of his cross, whether things on earth or things in heaven. 21 At one time you also were alienated and hostile in mind and in evil deeds. 22 But now he has reconciled you by his physical body through death to present you holy, blameless, and above accusation before him, 23 if indeed you continue in the faith, established and firm, not moved away from the hope of the gospel that you heard, which was proclaimed to every person created under heaven. This is the gospel of which I, Paul, became a servant.
24 Now I rejoice in my sufferings for you, and I fill up in my flesh what is lacking of the afflictions of Christ for the sake of his body, which is the church. 25 It is of this church that I am a servant, according to the stewardship from God that was given to me for you, to fulfill the word of God. 26 This is the mystery that was hidden for ages and for generations but now has been revealed to God's holy people. 27 It is to them that God wanted to make known the riches of the glory of this mystery among the Gentiles, which is Christ in you, the hope of glory. 28 We proclaim him, warning every person and teaching every person with all wisdom, so that we may present every person mature in Christ. 29 For this I labor and strive according to his energy that is at work in me in power.
As in a typical letter, Paul begins his letter in verses 1-2 by introducing Timothy and himself to the Christians in Colossae.
Paul writes much of this chapter around two subjects: who Christ is, and what Christ has done for the Christian.
Paul refers to a "secret truth" in this chapter. The role of the church in the plans of God was once unknown. But God has now revealed it. Part of this involves the Gentiles having equal standing with the Jews in the plans of God. (See: reveal)
Paul uses many different images to describe Christian living. In this chapter, he uses the images of "walking" and "bearing fruit." (See: fruit)
A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Verse 24 is a paradox: "Now I rejoice in my sufferings for you." People do not usually rejoice when they suffer. But in verses 25-29 Paul explains why his suffering is good. (Colossians 1:24)
Though this letter is from Paul and Timothy to the Colossian believers, later in the letter Paul makes it clear that he is the writer. Most likely Timothy was with him and wrote the words down as Paul spoke. Throughout this letter the words "we," "our," and "ours" include the Colossians unless noted otherwise. The words "you," "your," and "yours" refer to the Colossian believers and so are plural unless noted otherwise.
"whom God chose to be an apostle of Christ Jesus"
This page has intentionally been left blank.
These words do not include the Colossians.
Paul is excluding his audience.
"your belief in Christ Jesus"
Here "hope" stands for what the believer can confidently expect, that is, the things that God has promised to do for all believers. These things are spoken of as if they were physical objects that God was keeping in heaven for the believers to possess later. Alternate translation: "because of what you hope for that is reserved for you in heaven" or "because you are confident that God, who is in heaven, will do the many good things that he has promised you"
Possible meanings are 1) "the message about the truth, the gospel" or 2) "the true message, the gospel."
"Fruit" here is a metaphor for "result" or "outcome." Alternate translation: "This gospel is having good results, more and more" or "This gospel is having increasing results"
This is a generalization referring to the part of the world that they knew about. Alternate translation: "throughout the world"
"the true grace of God"
The word "our" does not include the Colossians.
"gospel. It is exactly what you learned from Epaphras, who is our beloved fellow servant and who" or "gospel. It is exactly what Epaphras, our beloved fellow servant, taught you. He"
Here "on our behalf" means that Epaphras was doing work for Christ that Paul himself would have done if he were not in prison.
the man who preached the gospel to the people in Colossae
The word "us" does not include the Colossians.
Paul speaks of the Holy Spirit as if he were a place in which the believers were located. Alternate translation: "how the Holy Spirit has enabled you to love believers"
Because the Spirit has enabled them to love others, Paul prays for them and tells them here how he prays for them.
"Because the Holy Spirit has enabled you to love other believers"
The word "we" does not include the Colossians.
"from the day Epaphras told us these things"
Paul speaks of the Colossian believers as though they were containers. Alternate translation: "that God will fill you with what you need to know so that you can do his will"
"so that the Holy Spirit will make you wise and able to understand what God wants you to do"
Walking here signifies behavior in life. Alternate translation: "that you will live as God expects you to and so please him"
Paul is speaking of the Colossian believers as if they were trees or plants that grow and bear fruit. Alternate translation: "by making sure that all of your good works please God and people and growing"
"always getting to know God better" or "always learning more about God"
This page has intentionally been left blank.
"allowed you to share"
Here Paul is focusing on his readers as receivers of God's blessings. But he does not mean that he himself has no share in those blessings.
Receiving what God has promised believers is spoken of as if it were inheriting property and wealth from a family member.
This idea is opposite to the idea of the dominion of darkness in the next verse. Alternate translation: "in the glory of his presence"
Paul talks about the ways in which Christ is excellent.
"God has rescued us"
"Darkness" here is a metaphor for evil. Alternate translation: "the evil forces that controlled us"
"Son" is an important title for Jesus, the Son of God.
This page has intentionally been left blank.
"His Son is the image of the invisible God." Here "image" does not mean a representation of something that is visible. Instead, "image" here means that by knowing the Son, we learn what God the Father is like.
The expression "firstborn" does not refer to when Jesus was born. Instead, it refers to his position as the eternal Son of God the Father. In this sense, "firstborn" is a metaphor meaning "most important." Jesus is the most important and the unique Son of God. Alternate translation: "God's Son, the most important one over all creation"
The noun "creation" can be translated with a verb. Alternate translation: "over all that God created"
Here "him" refers to the Son. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "For in him God created all things"
Here "him" refers to the Son. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "God created all things through him and for him"
"It is he who existed before all things"
Paul is speaking here of the Son controlling all things as if he were physically holding them together. "he holds everything together"
"Jesus Christ, the Son of God, is the head"
Paul speaks of Jesus's position over the church as if he were the head on the human body. As the head rules the body, so does Jesus rule the church.
"the originating authority." He is the first chief or founder.
Jesus is the first person to die and come back to life, never to die again.
This page has intentionally been left blank.
This is an important title for Jesus, the Son of God.
"by means of the blood Jesus shed on the cross"
Here "blood" stands for the death of Christ on the cross.
This phrase explains what "all things" means. Some languages might prefer to put it closer to "all things."
Paul makes it clear that God has now revealed that Christ exchanges the sin of Gentile believers for his holiness.
"There was a time when you Colossian believers also"
were no longer living in loving relationship with God
Paul uses two concepts, "blameless" and "above accusation," that mean almost the same thing to emphasize the idea of perfection. Alternate translation: "holy and perfect"
This expression of location stands for "in God's view" or "in God's mind"
To be moved away from the hope of the gospel is a metaphor meaning to stop hoping in what God promised in the gospel. Alternate translation: "continuing in the hope of the gospel that you heard" or "continuing to hope in the promises of God that you heard about in the gospel"
The hope of the gospel is the confident expectation that God will do what the gospel teaches he will do. Alternate translation: "continuing to confidently expect what is promised in the gospel"
This can be translated with an active phrase. Alternate translation: "which believers proclaimed"
God created everyone. The phrase "under heaven" is a metonym for in the world. Alternate translation: "to every person in the world"
Paul was a servant of God. Alternate translation: "the gospel that I, Paul, serve God by proclaiming"
Paul speaks about the suffering that he continues to experience. He may be acknowledging here that there is much suffering that he and all other Christians must endure before Christ comes again, and that Christ in a spiritual sense joins with them in experiencing these hardships. Paul certainly does not mean that Christ's sufferings alone were not enough to provide salvation for the believers.
Paul speaks of his body as if it were a container that could hold suffering.
Paul often speaks of the church, the group of all Christian believers, as if it were Christ's body.
This means to bring about the purpose of God's gospel message, which is that it be preached and believed. "Word of God" here is a metonym for the message from God. Alternate translation: "to be obedient to what God has instructed"
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "This is the mystery that God had hidden"
The words "ages" and "generations" refer to the time period from the creation of the world until the time when the gospel was preached.
This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "now God has revealed it to his holy people"
Paul speaks of the value of this mystery about God as if it were a treasure of material wealth. Alternate translation: "the greatness of the glory of this mystery"
The mystery that God has made known is "Christ in you." Paul speaks of believers as if they were containers in which Christ is present. This is one of his ways of expressing the union of the believers with Christ. Alternate translation: "which is that Christ is in you" or "which is that Christ is united to you"
The fact that Christ is in believers gives believers hope that they will share in God's glory. Alternate translation: "so you can confidently expect to share in God's glory" or "so you can confidently wait for God's glory"
These instances of "we" include Paul and his companions but do not include the Colossians.
You may need to make explicit to whom they will present every person. Alternate translation: "so that we may present to God every person"
This page has intentionally been left blank.
1 For I want you to know how great a struggle I have had for you, for those at Laodicea, and for as many as have not seen my face in the flesh. 2 I work so that their hearts may be encouraged by being brought together in love and into all the riches of full assurance of understanding, into the knowledge of the mystery of God, that is, Christ. 3 In him all the treasures of wisdom and knowledge are hidden. 4 I say this so that no one may trick you with persuasive speech. 5 Although I am not with you in the flesh, yet I am with you in spirit. I rejoice to see your good order and the strength of your faith in Christ.
6 As you received Christ Jesus the Lord, walk in him. 7 Be rooted in him, be built on him, be established in faith just as you were taught, and abound in thanksgiving.
8 See that no one captures you through philosophy and empty deceit, according to the tradition of men, conforming to the elemental spirits of the world, and not conforming to Christ. 9 For in him all the fullness of God lives in bodily form. 10 You have been filled in him, who is the head over every ruler and authority. 11 In him you were also circumcised with a circumcision not done by humans in the removal of the body of flesh, but in the circumcision of Christ. 12 You were buried with him in baptism, and in him you were raised up through faith in the power of God, who raised him from the dead. 13 When you were dead in your trespasses and in the uncircumcision of your flesh, he made you alive together with him and forgave us all of our trespasses. [1]14 He blotted out the written record of debts that was hostile to us with its regulations. He took it away by nailing it to the cross. 15 He disarmed the rulers and authorities and made a public spectacle of them, triumphing over them by the cross.
16 So then, let no one judge you in eating or in drinking, or about a festival or a new moon, or about Sabbath days. 17 These are a shadow of the things to come, but the substance is Christ. 18 Let no one who wants humility and the worship of angels judge you out of your prize. Such a person enters into the things he has seen and becomes puffed up for no reason by his fleshly thinking. 19 He does not hold on to the head. It is from the head that the whole body throughout its joints and ligaments is supplied and held together; it grows with the growth given by God.
20 If you died together with Christ to the elemental spirits of the world, why do you live as obligated to the world: 21 "Do not handle, nor taste, nor touch"? 22 All these things will perish with use, according to the commandments and teachings of men. 23 These rules have the appearance of wisdom, with their self-made religion and humility and severe treatment of the body. But they have no value against the indulgence of the flesh.
In verses 11-12, Paul uses both the old covenant sign of circumcision and the new covenant sign of baptism to show how Christians are united with Christ and freed from sin.
This is a complex issue. "Flesh" is possibly a metaphor for our sinful nature. Paul is not teaching that the physical part of man is sinful. Paul appears to be teaching that, while Christians are alive ("in the flesh"), we will continue to sin. But our new nature will be fighting against our old nature. Paul also uses "flesh" in this chapter to refer to the physical body.
Paul mentions several issues in this chapter that imply information about the context of the church in Colossae. It is best to allow the text to remain uncertain over the actual details.
Paul continues to encourage the believers in Colossae and Laodicea to understand that Christ is God and that he lives in believers, so they should live in the same way they received him.
Paul has exerted much effort in developing their purity and their understanding of the gospel.
This was a city very close to Colossae where there was another church for which Paul was praying.
Here "face in the flesh" represents the person as a whole. Alternate translation: "all those who have never seen me personally" or "all those whom I have never met face to face"
Paul includes the Colossians even though he uses a different pronoun. Alternate translation: "so that their hearts and yours"
This means brought together in a close relationship.
Paul speaks of a person who is completely sure that the good news is true as though that person were rich in physical things.
This is knowledge that can be revealed only by God.
Jesus Christ is the mystery revealed by God.
Only Christ can reveal God's true wisdom and knowledge. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "God has hidden all the treasures of wisdom and knowledge in Christ"
Paul speaks of God's wisdom and knowledge as if they were material wealth. Alternate translation: "the very precious wisdom and knowledge"
These words mean basically the same thing here. Paul uses them together to emphasize that all spiritual understanding comes from Christ.
This means to cause someone to believe something that is not true, so he acts on that belief, and suffers harm as a result.
speech that will make people change what they believe
The person's flesh, or physical body, is a metonym for the person. Alternate translation: "not physically present with you"
Being with someone in spirit is a metaphor for thinking continually about that person. Alternate translation: "I continually think about you"
the proper way of doing things
"how nothing and no one can cause you to stop believing"
Walking on a path is a metaphor for how a person lives his life. The words "in him" refer to being in close relationship with Christ and so doing what pleases him. Alternate translation: "live your lives the way he wants you to" or "live so that people can see that you belong to him"
These words explain what it means to "walk in him."
Paul speaks of a person with true faith in Christ as if that person were a tree growing in solid ground with deep roots.
Paul speaks of a person with true faith in Christ as if that person were a building that has a strong foundation.
"trust in Jesus for everything"
This is best stated without naming or otherwise calling attention to the teacher, who was Epaphras (Colossians 1:7). Alternate translation: "just as you learned" or "just as they taught you" or "just as he taught you"
Paul speaks of thanksgiving as if it were objects that a person could obtain more of. Alternate translation: "be very thankful to God"
Paul urges the believers to be careful not to turn to the words and rules of others because nothing can add to the fullness of God that believers have in Christ.
"Make sure that"
Paul speaks of the way a person can believe false teachings
religious doctrines and beliefs that are not from God's word but are based on man's thoughts about God and life
Paul speaks of false ideas that produce nothing and so are without value as though they are containers with nothing in them.
The "tradition of men" may refer to Jewish traditions, while "the elemental spirits of the world" refers to pagan (Gentile) belief systems. Both of these are worthless.
Possible meanings are 1) spiritual powers that some people thought control what happens on earth, or 2) the laws or moral principles of the world.
"God's total nature lives in physical form in Christ"
Paul speaks of people as though they were containers into which God has placed Christ. Alternate translation: "You are made complete in Christ"
Christ is the ruler over every other ruler
Paul is speaking of those who belong to Christ as if they were inside Christ's body. This can also be made active. Alternate translation: "When you joined the church in baptism, God circumcised you"
With this metaphor, Paul says that God has made Christian believers acceptable to himself in a way that reminded him of circumcision, the ceremony through which Hebrew male babies were added to the community of Israel.
Paul speaks of being baptized and joining the assembly of believers as if it were being buried with Christ. This can be made active. Alternate translation: "God buried you with Christ when you joined the church in baptism"
With this metaphor, Paul speaks of the new spiritual life of believers that God made possible by making Christ come alive again. This can be made active. Alternate translation: "because you have joined yourself to Christ, God raised you up" or "in him God caused you to live again"
Here to raise up is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: "God raised you up" or "God caused you to live again"
Paul speaks of unresponsiveness to God as if it were death. Alternate translation: "When you Colossian believers were unable to respond to God"
With this metaphor Paul speaks of coming into new spiritual life as if it were coming back to life physically.
You were dead on two accounts: 1) you were spiritually dead, living a life of sin against Christ and 2) you were not circumcised according to the law of Moses.
"he forgave us, both us Jews and you Gentiles, of all our trespasses"
Paul speaks of God forgiving our sins as if God were forgiving a debt that we owe him.
When someone blots out words, they cover the words with ink so that no one can read them.
"that was opposed to us"
In Roman times, it was common practice for the Roman armies to have a victory parade when they returned home, displaying all the prisoners they had captured and goods they had obtained. God was victorious over the evil powers and authorities.
Here "the cross" stands for Christ's death on the cross.
The law of Moses included what one could eat and drink. "for what you eat or what you drink"
The law of Moses specified the days to celebrate, to worship, and to offer sacrifice. "for the way you celebrate festivals or new moons or the Sabbath"
A shadow shows the shape of an object, but it is not the object itself. In a similar way, the festivals, celebrations, and Sabbaths show us something about how God would save people, but those things do not save people. The savior is Christ. Alternate translation: "These are like a shadow of what would happen, but the reality is Christ" or "These are like a shadow of the savior who would come, but the savior is Christ"
Here Paul refers to false teachers as if they were corrupt judges at an athletic contest who would unjustly disqualify the believers from winning the prizes they deserve, and he speaks of Christ saving a person as if Christ were giving a prize to the winner of such a contest. Alternate translation: "Let no one ... disqualify you from winning a prize"
The word "humility" is a metonym for actions one does to make others think that one is humble. Alternate translation: "who wants you to do things to show that you are humble"
Here Paul speaks about people who claim to have dreams and visions from God and who talk proudly about them.
Here Paul says that sinful ways of thinking make a person arrogant. Alternate translation: "puffs himself up for no reason by means of his fleshly thinking"
Here a person who boasts is spoken of as if he were an object into which someone had blown air to make it larger than it should be.
Here the idea of flesh stands for the sinful human nature. "the sinful thoughts he naturally thinks"
A person not trusting in Christ is spoken of has if they do not hold firmly to the head. Christ is spoken of as if he were the head of a body. Alternate translation: "He does not firmly grasp Christ, who is like the head of a body" or "He does not cling to Christ, who is like the head of a body"
Paul speaks of the church, which is ruled and empowered by Christ, as if it were a human body. Alternate translation: "It is from the head that God supplies the whole body throughout its joints and ligaments and holds it together"
A believer is spiritually united with Christ. As Christ died, the believer has died to the elemntal spirits of the world. This is a metaphor for no longer responding to the elemenatry spirits of the world. The believer is no longer controlled by them.
Possible meanings are 1) spiritual powers that some people thought control what happens on earth, or 2) the laws or moral principles of the world. See how you translated this in Colossians 2:8.
"think you must obey the desires of the world"
the thoughts, desires, and assumptions of the sinful majority of the world's people
The rhetorical question that begins with the words "why do you live as obligated to the world" in verse 20 ends here. Paul uses this question to rebuke the Colossians for following the false beliefs of the world. "you should not live as obligated to the world: 'Do ... touch'!"
Paul is quoting what other people have been telling the Colossians and using a rhetorical question to challenge them. Alternate translation: "why do you believe them when they say, 'Do not handle, nor taste, nor touch'?" or "you should not obey them when they say, 'Do not handle, nor taste, nor touch'"
This page has intentionally been left blank.
"These rules seem wise to unbelieving people because they allow those who follow them to appear humble because they hurt their own bodies"
"do not help you stop following your human desires"
1 If then God has raised you with Christ, seek the things above, where Christ is sitting at the right hand of God. 2 Think about the things above, not about the things on earth. 3 For you have died, and your life is hidden with Christ in God. 4 When Christ appears, who is your life, then you will also appear with him in glory. [1]
5 Put to death, then, the members that are on earth—sexual immorality, uncleanness, passion, evil desire, and greed, which is idolatry. 6 It is for these things that the wrath of God is coming on the sons of disobedience. [2]7 It is in these things that you also once walked when you lived in them. 8 But now you must get rid of all these things—wrath, anger, evil intentions, slander, and obscene speech from your mouth. 9 Do not lie to one another, since you have taken off the old man with its practices, 10 and you have put on the new man that is being made new in knowledge according to the image of the one who created it, 11 where there is no Greek or Jew, circumcision or uncircumcision, barbarian, Scythian, slave, freeman, but Christ is all, and is in all.
12 Therefore, as God's chosen ones, holy and beloved, put on a heart of mercy, kindness, humility, gentleness, and patience. 13 Bear with one another. Be gracious to each other. If someone has a complaint against someone else, forgive in the same way that the Lord has forgiven you. 14 Above all these things, have love, which is the bond of perfection. 15 Let the peace of Christ rule in your hearts. It was for this peace that you were called in one body. And be thankful. 16 Let the word of Christ live in you richly, teaching and instructing one another with all wisdom, singing psalms and hymns and spiritual songs with thankfulness in your hearts to God. 17 Whatever you do, in word or in deed, do all in the name of the Lord Jesus. Give thanks to God the Father through him.
18 Wives, submit to your husbands, as it is appropriate in the Lord. 19 Husbands, love your wives, and do not be bitter against them. 20 Children, obey your parents in all things, for this is pleasing in the Lord. 21 Fathers, do not provoke your children, so that they will not be discouraged. 22 Slaves, obey your masters according to the flesh in all things, not with eye-service, as people-pleasers, but with a sincere heart. Fear the Lord. 23 Whatever you do, work from the soul as to the Lord and not as to people. 24 You know that you will receive from the Lord the reward of the inheritance. It is the Lord Christ whom you serve. 25 For anyone who does unrighteousness will receive the penalty for the unrighteousness that he did, and there is no partiality.
The second part of this chapter parallels Ephesians 5 and 6.
The old and new self mean the same as the old and new man. The term "old man" probably refers to the sinful nature with which a person is born. The "new man" is the new nature or new life that God gives a person after they come to believe in Christ. (See: sin and faith)
Many of the things Paul encourages his readers to pursue or avoid are not actions but character qualities. Because of this, they may be difficult to translate.
Where God dwells is often pictured as being located "above." Paul says to "seek the things above" and to "think about the things above." He is implying Christians should seek and think about heavenly and godly things.
Paul warns the believers that because they are one with Christ, they ought not do certain things.
This is an idiom that means "because."
Here to raise up is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Possible meanings are 1) because God has caused Christ to come alive again, God has already given the believers in Colossae new spiritual life. Alternate translation: "God has given you new life because you belong to Christ" or 2) because God has caused Christ to come alive again, the believers in Colossae can know that after they die they will live with Christ, and Paul can speak of the believers living again as if it has already happened. Alternate translation: "you can be sure that God will give you life as he has caused Christ to come alive again"
"things in heaven"
To sit at the "right hand of God" is a symbolic action of receiving great honor and authority from God. Alternate translation: "where Christ is sitting in the place of honor beside God" or "where Christ is sitting in the place of honor at God's right side"
This page has intentionally been left blank.
As Christ actually died, so God counts the Colossian believers as having died with Christ.
Paul speaks of people's lives as if they were objects that can be hidden in containers and speaks of God as if he were a container. Alternate translation: Possible meanings are 1) "it is as though God has taken your life and concealed it with Christ in God's presence" or 2) "only God knows what your true life really is, and he will reveal it when he reveals Christ"
Another possible meaning is "Christ is revealed ... you will also be revealed," which can be translated in active form. Alternate translation: "God reveals Christ ... he will also reveal you"
Christ is the one who gives spiritual life to the believer.
The word "members" here refers to parts of a person's nature. Being "on earth" or being worldly is a metaphor for being sinful. The rest of the verse is a list of sinful "members" or behaviors. Alternate translation: "the earthly parts of your nature" or "the parts of your nature that are worldly"
"impure behavior"
"lust" or "extremely strong desires"
"greed, which is the same thing as idolatry" or "do not be greedy because that is the same as worshiping idols"
God's anger against those who do evil as shown by what he does to punish them.
This is an idiom that means they were characterized by disobedience. The abstract noun "disobedience" can be stated as a verb. Alternate translation: "disobedient people" or "people who disobey him"
Paul speaks of the way a person behaves as if it were a road or path a person walks on. Alternate translation: "These are the things you used to do"
Possible meanings are 1) "when you practiced these things" or 2) "when you lived among the people who disobey God"
"desire to do wicked deeds"
speech used to hurt others by saying untrue things about them
words that do not belong in polite conversation
Here "mouth" is a metonym for talk. "in your talk"
Paul continues to tell the believers how to live and reminds them that Christians should treat everyone according to the same standard.
Here Paul is speaking of a Christian's rejecting his old sinful life as if it were an old garment that he takes off in order to put on a new garment. It was very common for Israelites such as Paul to speak of moral qualities as if they were pieces of clothing.
Here Paul is speaking of a Christian's rejecting his old sinful life as if it were an old garment that he takes off
This refers to Jesus Christ.
These terms are examples of the categories of people that Paul says do not matter for God. God sees every person alike, not by race, religion, nationality, or social status. Alternate translation: "race, religion, culture, and social status do not matter"
a foreigner who does not know local customs
This is someone from the land of Scythia, which was outside the Roman Empire. Greeks and Romans used this word for someone who grew up in a place where everyone did wicked things all the time.
Nothing is excluded or left out of the rule of Christ. Alternate translation: "Christ is all important and lives in all his people"
This can be made active. Alternate translation: "as those whom God has chosen for himself, whom he desires to see live for him alone, and whom he loves"
The "heart" is a metaphor for feelings and attitudes. Here it is spoken of as if it had certain feelings and attitudes, and as if it were clothing to wear. Alternate translation: "have a merciful, kind, humble, gentle, and patient heart" or "be merciful, kind, humble, gentle, and patient"
"Be patient with one another" or "Accept each other even when you disappoint each other"
"Treat others better than they deserve to have you to treat them"
The abstract noun "complaint" can be stated as "complain." Alternate translation: "has a reason to complain against"
Here "bond of perfection" is a metaphor for something that causes perfect unity among people. Alternate translation: "love one another because doing so will unite you perfectly together.
Paul speaks of the peace that Christ gives as if it were a ruler. Possible meanings are 1) "Do everything so that you can have peaceful relationships with each other" or 2) "Allow God to give you peace in your heart"
Here "hearts" is a metonym for a people's minds or inner beings. Alternate translation: "in your minds" or "inside of you"
Paul speaks of Christ's word as if it were a person capable of living inside other people. "Word of Christ" here is a metonym for the teachings of Christ. Alternate translation: "Be obedient to the instructions of Christ" or "Always trust Christ's promises"
"singing all sorts of songs to praise God." Some interpreters believe that "psalms," "hymns," and "spiritual songs" all refer to different psalms in the book of Psalms.
These are probably songs from the Old Testament book of Psalms that Christians sang.
Here "hearts" is a metonym for people's minds or inner beings. Alternate translation: "with thankfulness in your minds" or "being thankful"
"in speaking or in acting"
Acting in the name of a person here is a metonym for acting to help other people think well of that person. Alternate translation: "to honor the Lord Jesus" or "so that others will know you belong to the Lord Jesus and will think well of him" or "as if the Lord Jesus himself were doing it"
Possible meanings are 1) because he has done great deeds or 2) because he has made it possible for people to speak to God and so give him thanks.
Paul begins to give special instructions to wives, husbands, children, fathers, slaves, and masters.
"Wives, obey"
"it is proper" or "it is right"
"do not be harsh with" or "do not be angry at"
This page has intentionally been left blank.
"do not needlessly make your children angry"
"obey your human masters"
"things. Do not obey only when your master is watching, as though you need only to please people, but be sincere"
"Heart" here is a metonym for a person's thoughts or intentions. Alternate translation: "with all honest intentions" or "with sincerity"
"as you would work for the Lord"
"the inheritance as your reward"
Receiving what God has promised believers is spoken of as if it were inheriting property and wealth from a family member.
The phrase "receive the penalty" means to be punished. Alternate translation: "anyone who does unrighteousness will be punished" or "God will punish anyone who does what is unrighteous"
who actively does wrong of any kind
The abstract noun "partiality" can be expressed with the verb "favor." To favor some people is to judge them by different standards so the result is better for them than for others who do the same actions. Alternate translation: "God does not favor anyone" or "God judges everyone by the same standard"
1 Masters, give to slaves what is right and fair, knowing you also have a Master in heaven.
2 Continue steadfastly in prayer, staying alert in it in thanksgiving, 3 praying together for us also, that God would open a door to us for the word, to speak the mystery of Christ, for which also I have been in chains. 4 Pray that I may make it clear, as I ought to speak. 5 Walk in wisdom toward those outside, and redeem the time. 6 Let your words always be with grace. Let them be seasoned with salt, so that you may know how you should answer each person.
7 As for all the things concerning me, Tychicus will make them known to you. He is a beloved brother, a faithful servant, and fellow slave in the Lord. 8 I have sent him to you for this, that you might know the matters about us, and so that he may encourage your hearts. [1]9 I have sent him together with Onesimus, the faithful and beloved brother, who is one of you. They will make known to you everything that has happened here.
10 Aristarchus, my fellow prisoner, greets you, as well as Mark, the cousin of Barnabas (about whom you received orders; if he comes to you, receive him), 11 and also Jesus who is called Justus. These alone of the circumcision are my fellow workers for the kingdom of God. They have been a comfort to me. 12 Epaphras greets you. He is one of you and a slave of Christ Jesus. He always strives for you in prayer, so that you may stand complete and fully assured in all the will of God. 13 For I can testify that he works hard for you, for those in Laodicea, and for those in Hierapolis. 14 Luke the beloved physician and Demas greet you. 15 Greet the brothers in Laodicea, and Nympha, and the church that is in her house. 16 When this letter has been read among you, have it read also in the church of the Laodiceans, and see that you also read the letter from Laodicea. 17 Say to Archippus, "Look to the ministry that you have received in the Lord, that you should fulfill it."
18 This greeting is with my own hand—Paul. Remember my chains. May grace be with you.
Colossians 4:1 appears to belong with the topics of Chapter 3 instead of Chapter 4.
It was common in the ancient Near East for the author to speak and someone else to write down the words. Many of the New Testament letters were written this way. Paul wrote the final greeting himself.
Paul refers to a "secret truth" in this chapter. The role of the church in the plans of God was once unknown. But God has now revealed it. Part of this involves the Gentiles having equal standing with the Jews in the plans of God. (See: reveal)
After speaking to masters, Paul ends his special instructions to the different kinds of believers in the church at Colossae.
These words mean almost the same thing and are used to emphasize the things that are morally correct.
Paul implies that God, as the Master in heaven, will give his servants what is right and fair. This could be blessing for the earthly master who treats his servants kindly or punishment for the earthly master who treats his servants unkindly. Alternate translation: "you also have a Master, who is God in heaven"
Paul continues to give instructions to believers on how to live and speak.
"Keep praying faithfully" or "Keep praying consistently"
Here the word "us" refers to Paul and Timothy but not the Colossians.
Opening a door for someone is a metaphor for giving that person the opportunity to do something. Alternate translation: "God would provide opportunities for us"
"make an opportunity for us to preach his message"
This refers to the gospel of Jesus Christ, which was not understood before Christ came.
Here "in chains" is a metonym for being in prison, though Paul probably also was physically attached to a chain. Paul was in chains because he told people about the mystery of Christ. Alternate translation: "It is for proclaiming the message of Jesus Christ that I am now in prison"
"Pray that I might be able to speak the message of Jesus Christ clearly"
The idea of walking is often used for the idea of conducting one's life. Alternate translation: "Live in such a way that those who are not believers will see that you are wise"
To "redeem" something means to restore it to its rightful owner. Here time is spoken of as something that can be restored and used to serve God. Alternate translation: "do the best things you can with your time" or "put the time to its best use"
Food with salt is a metaphor for words that teach others and that others enjoy hearing. Alternate translation: "Let your conversation always be gracious and attractive"
"so that you may know how to answer questions from anyone about Jesus Christ" or "so that you may be able to treat every person well"
Paul closes with special instructions about certain people as well as greetings to and from individual believers.
"everything that has been happening to me"
"fellow servant." Though Paul is a free man, he sees himself as a servant of Christ and sees Tychicus as a fellow servant.
These words do not include the Colossians.
The heart was thought to be the center of many emotions. Alternate translation: "may encourage you"
Onesimus was a slave of Philemon in Colossae. He had stolen money from Philemon and run away to Rome where he became a Christian through the ministry of Paul. Now Tychicus and Onesimus are the ones bringing Paul's letter to Colossae along with a letter from Paul to Philemon asking him to send Onesimus back to Paul.
Paul calls Onesimus a fellow Christian and servant of Christ.
"Tychicus and Onesimus will make known"
All that is taking place where Paul is currently living. Tradition says Paul was in Rome under house arrest or in prison at this time.
He was in prison with Paul in Ephesus when Paul wrote this letter to the Colossians.
"if Mark comes"
This is a man who also worked with Paul.
Paul uses "circumcision" here to refer to Jews because, under the Old Testament law, all male Jews had to be circumcised. Alternate translation: "These three men are the only Jewish believers working with me to proclaim God as king through Christ Jesus"
"These men—Aristarchus, Mark, and Justus—alone of the circumcision"
Epaphras was the man who had preached the good news to the people in Colossae (Colossians 1:7).
"from your city" or "your fellow townsman"
"a committed disciple of Christ Jesus"
"earnestly prays for you"
"you may stand mature and confident"
Laodicea and Hierapolis were towns close to Colossae.
This man was one of Paul's co-workers.
Here this means fellow Christians, including both men and women.
a city very close to Colossae where there was also a church
A woman named Nympha hosted a house church. Alternate translation: "Nympha and the group of believers that meets in her house"
This page has intentionally been left blank.
Paul reminds Archippus of the task God had given him and that he, Archippus, was under obligation to the Lord to fulfill it. The words "Look," "you have received," and "you should fulfill" all refer to Archippus and should be singular.
Paul closes his letter with a greeting written in his own handwriting.
The word "chains" is a metaphor that Paul uses to indicate that he is in prison, but it is also likely that he was literally attached to a chain. Alternate translation: "Remember me and pray for me while I am in prison"
Here "grace" stands for God, who shows grace or acts kindly to believers. Alternate translation: "I pray that our Lord Jesus Christ would continue to act graciously toward you all"
1 ۱۔پَولُسؔ کی طرف سے جو خُدا کی مَرضی سے یِسُوعؔ مسِیح کا رَسُول ہونے کے لیے بُلایا گیا اور بھائی سوستھِینؔس کی طرف سے۔ 2 ۲۔خُدا کی کلِیسِیا کے نام جو کُرِنتھُسؔ میں ہَےاور اُن کے نام جو مسِیح میں پاک کیےگَئےاور مُقَدّس لوگ ہونے کے لیےبُلائے گَئے ہَیں اور اُن سب کے نام بھی جو ہر جگہ ہمارے خُداوَند یِسُوعؔ مسِیح کا نام لیتے ہَیں، جو اُن کا اور ہمارا خُداوَندہَے۔ 3 ۳۔ہمارے باپ خُدا اور خُداوَند یِسُوعؔ مسِیح کی طرف سے فضْل اور اِطمینان تُمھیں حاصِل ہوتا رہَے۔ 4 ۴۔ مَیں اُس فضْل کے لیے جو یِسُوعؔ مسِیح کے وسِیلے سے تُم پر ہو رہا ہَے ہمیشہ اپنے خُدا باپ کا شُکر کرتا ہُوں ۔ 5 ۵۔ کہ تُم اُس میں ہو کر کلام اور عِلْم کی ہر طرح کی دَولت سے مالا مال ہو گَئے ہو۔ 6 ۶۔چُنانچہ مسِیح کی گواہی تُم میں قائِم ہُوئی ۔ 7 ۷۔حَتیٰ کہ تُم کِسی نِعمَت میں کم نہیں اور ہمارے خُداوَند یِسُوعؔ مسِیح کے ظُہُور کے مُنتَظِر ہو۔ 8 ۸۔جو تُم کو ہمارے خُداوَند یِسُوعؔ مسِیح کے دِن میں بے اِلزام نِکلنے کے لیے آخِر تک قائِم بھی رکھّے گا۔ 9 ۹۔خُدا وفادار ہَےجِس نے اپنے بیٹے خُداوَند یِسُوعؔ مسِیح کی شراکت کے لیے تُمھیں بُلایا ہَے۔ 10 ۱۰۔اَب اَے بھائِیو!ہمارے خُداوَند یِسُوعؔ مسِیح کے نام سے مَیں تُم سے اِلتِماس کرتا ہُوں کہ تُم سب ایک ہی بات کہو اور تُمھارے بیِچ تَفرِقے نہ ہوں بلکہ باکمال طور سے یک دِل اور یک رائے ہو کر باہم مُنسَلِک رہو۔ 11 ۱۱۔کیُونکہ اَے بھائِیو ! مُجھے تُمھاری نِسبت خلؔوئے کے گھر والوں سے معلُوم ہُوا کہ تُم میں جَھگڑے ہو رہَے ہَیں۔ 12 ۱۲۔اَب میرے کہنے کا مطلب یہ ہَے کہ تُم میں سے کوئی تو خُود کو پَولُسؔ کا کہتاہَےاور کوئی اَپّلُوسؔ کا ، اور کوئی کَیفاؔ کا اور کوئی مسِیح کا۔ 13 ۱۳۔کیا مسِیح بَٹ گیا ہَے؟ کیا پَولُسؔ تُمھاری خاطِر مَصلُوب ہُوا تھا؟ یا کیا تُمھیں پَولُسؔ کے نام سے بَپتِسمہ دِیا گیا تھا؟ 14 ۱۴۔مَیں خُدا کا شُکر کرتا ہُوں کہ مَیں نے کرِسپُسؔ اور گیُسؔ کے سِوا تُم میں سے کِسی کو بَپتِسمہ نہیں دِیا۔ 15 ۱۵۔تا کہ کوئی یہ نہ کہنے پائے کہ مَیں نے اپنے نام سے بَپتِسمہ دِیا ہَے۔ 16 ۱۶۔ہاں مَیں نے ستِفنَاسؔ کے گھرانے کو بھی بَپتِسمہ دِیا اور مُجھے معلُوم نہیں کہ اِن کے علاوہ کِسی کو بَپتِسمہ دِیا ہو۔ 17 ۱۷۔کیُونکہ مسِیح نے مُجھے بَپتِسمہ دینے کو نہیں بلکہ خُوش خبری کی مُنادی کے لیے بھیجا ہَے،وہ بھی کلام کی حِکْمَت سے نہیں ،تا کہ مسِیح کی صلِیب بے تاثِیر نہ ہو۔ 18 ۱۸۔کیُونکہ صَلیِب کا پیغام ہَلاک ہونے والوں کے نزدِیک تو بیوقُوفی ہَے مگر ہم نجات پانے والوں کے نزدِیک خُدا کی قُدرَت ہَے ۔ 19 ۱۹۔کیُونکہ لِکھا ہَے کہ مَیں حکِیموں کی حِکْمَت کو نیست اورعَقْل مَندوں کی عَقْل کو رَدّ کرُوں گا۔ 20 ۲۰۔کہاں کا حکِیم؟ کہاں کا فَقِیہہ ؟ کہا ں کا اِس جَہان کا بحث کرنے والا؟ کیا خُدا نے اِس دُنیا کی حِکْمَت کو بیوقُوفی نہیں ٹھہرایا؟ 21 ۲۱۔لِہٰذا جب دُنیا نے خُدا کی حِکْمَت کے مُطابِق خُدا کو نہ جانا تو خُدا کو یہ پَسند آیا کہ اِس مُنادی کی بیوقُوفی کے وسِیلے سے اِیمان لانے والوں کو نجات دے ۔ 22 ۲۲۔چُنانچہ یہُودی نِشان چاہتے ہَیں اور یُونانی حِکْمَت تلاش کرتے ہَیں ۔ 23 ۲۳۔مگر ہم مسِیح مَصلُوب کی مُنادی کرتے ہَیں جو یہُودِیوں کے نزدِیک ٹھوکر اور غَیر قَوموں کے نزدِیک بیوقُوفی ہَے ۔ وہ جو بُلائےہُوئےہَیں خواہ یہُودی ہوں خواہ یُونانی ۔اُن کے نزدِیک مسِیح خُدا کی قُدرت اور خُدا کی حِکْمَت ہَے ۔ خُدا کی بیوقُوفی آدمِیوں کی حِکْمَت سے زیادہ حِکْمَت والی ہَےاورخُدا کی کمزور ی آدمِیوں کے زور سے زیادہ زور آورہَے ۔ 26 ۲۶۔پَس اَے بھائِیو! اپنے بُلاوے پر غور کروکہ جِسْم کے لحاظ سے کئی حِکْمَت والے ، کئی اِختِیار والے اور کئی اشراف بُلائے نہیں گَئے۔ 27 ۲۷۔بلکہ خُدا نے دُنیا کے بیوُقُوفوں کو چُن لیا تا کہ حِکْمَت والوں کو شرمِندہ کرےاورخُدا نے دُنیا کے کَمزوروں کو چُن لیا تا کہ زور آوروں کو شرمِندہ کرے۔ 28 ۲۸۔اور خُدا نےدُنیا کے کمِینوں اور حَقِیروں کو بلکہ بے وجُودوں کو چُن لیا تا کہ وجُود والوں کو نیست کرے۔ 29 ۲۹۔تا کہ خُدا کے حضُور کوئی بَشَرفَخْر نہ کر سکے۔ 30 ۳۰۔لیکِن تُم اُس کی طرف سےمسِیح یِسُوعؔ میں ہو جِسے خُدا کی طرف سے ہماری حِکْمَت اور راستبازی اور پاکیزگی اور مَخلصِی ٹھہرایا گیا ہَے۔ 31 ۳۱۔تا کہ جیسا لِکھا ہَے وَیسا ہی ہو کہ فَخْر کرنے والا فَقَط خُداوَند پر ہی فَخْر کرے۔
1 ۱۔اور اَے بھائِیو!جب مَیں خُدا کی گواہی کی مُنادی کے لیےتُمھارے پاس آیا تو مَیں عُمدہ خِطابَت یا حِکْمَت کے ساتھ نہیں آیا تھا۔ 2 ۲۔کیُونکہ مَیں نے یہ تہَیّہ کر لِیا تھا کہ تُمھارے درمیان سوائے یِسُوعؔ مسِیح بلکہ مسِیح مَصلُوب کے اَورکِسی چِیز کی فِکْر نہ رکھّوں گا۔ 3 ۳۔اور مَیں نہایت کمزوری اور خوف کی حالت میں تھرتھراتے ہُوئےتُمھارے درمیان رہا۔ 4 ۴۔اور میری تقرِیر یا مُنادی میں اِنسانی حِکْمَت کی دِل لُبھانے والی باتیں نہ تھیں بلکہ رُوح اور قُدرت کا ظُہُور تھیں۔ 5 ۵۔ تا کہ تُمھارا اِیمان اِنسان کی حِکْمَت پر نہیں بلکہ خُدا کی قُدرت پر قائِم ہو۔ 6 ۶۔اگرچہ ہم کامِلوں کے درمیان حِکْمَت کی باتیں کرتے ہَیں تو بھی اِس دُنیا کی حِکْمَت اور اِس دُنیا کے سرداروں کی حِکْمَت سے نہیں جو نیست ہونے والی ہَے۔ 7 ۷۔بلکہ ہم خُدا کی اُس پوشِیدہ حِکْمَت کو بھید کے طور پر بیان کرتے ہَیں جو خُدا نے جَہان کے شُروع سے پیشتر ہمارے جَلال کے واسطے مُقَرَّر کی تھی۔ 8 ۸۔جِسے اِس جہان کے سرداروں میں سے کوئی نہ جانتا تھا کیُونکہ اَگر وہ جانتے تو جَلال کے خُداوَند کو مَصلُوب نہ کرتے۔ 9 ۹۔بلکہ جیسا لِکھا ہَے،’’جو چِیزیں نہ آنکھ نے دیکھیں، نہ کان نے سُنیں، نہ آدمی کے دِل میں آئیں۔وہ سب خُدا نے اپنے مَحبَّت رکھنے والوں کے لیے تَیّار کر دِیں۔‘‘ 10 ۱۰۔لیکِن اُن کو اپنے رُوح کے وسِیلے خُدا نے ہم پر ظاہِر کیا کیُونکہ رُوح سب باتیں دَریافت کر لیتا ہَے، یہاں تک کہ خُدا کی گہری باتیں بھی۔ 11 ۱۱۔کیُونکہ اِنسانوں میں سے کون اِنسان کی باتوں کو جانتا ہَے سِوا اِنسان کی اپنی رُوح کے جو اُس میں ہَے؟ اِسی طرح خُدا کی باتوں کو کوئی اِنسان نہیں جانتا، بلکہ صِرف خُدا کا رُوح جانتا ہَے ۔ 12 ۱۲۔مگر ہم نے اِس دُنیا کی رُوح نہیں ، بلکہ وہ رُوح پایا ہَے جو خُدا کی طرف سے ہَے تا کہ اُن چِیزوں کو جان سکیں جو خُدا نے ہمیں مُفْت عطا کی ہَیں۔ 13 ۱۳۔اور جو باتیں ہم کہتے ہَیں وہ ویسی نہیں جو اِنسانی حِکْمَت سِکھاتی ہے بلکہ جو پاک رُوح سِکھاتا ہَےاور ہم رُوحانی باتوں کا مُقابَلَہ رُوحانی باتوں کے ساتھ کرتے ہَیں۔ 14 ۱۴۔لیکِن نَفسانی آدمی خُدا کے رُوح کی باتیں قبُول نہیں کرتا کیُونکہ وہ اُس کے نزدِیک بیوُقُوفی کی باتیں ہَیں اور نہ ہی اُنھیں سمجھ سکتا ہَے کیُونکہ وہ رُوحانی طور پر سمجھی جا سکتی ہَیں۔ 15 ۱۵۔لیکِن جو رُوحانی ہَے وہ سب باتوں کو پَرَکھ لیتا ہَے مگر خُود کِسی سے پرکھا نہیں جاتا۔ 16 ۱۶۔پَس خُداوَند کی عَقْل کو کِس نے جانا ہَے کہ اُسے تَعلِیم دے سکے ؟ مگر ہم میں مسِیح کی عَقْل ہَے۔
1 ۱۔اور اَے بھائِیو! مَیں تُم سے ویسے کلام نہ کر سکا جیسے رُوحانِیوں سے بلکہ جَیسے جِسمانِیوں سے، بلکہ اُن سے بھی جومسِیح میں بَچّے ہَیں۔ 2 ۲۔مَیں نے تُمھیں دُودھ پِلایا اور کھانا نہ کھِلایا کیُونکہ تُمھیں اِس کی برداشت نہ تھی،بلکہ اَب بھی برداشت نہیں ۔ 3 ۳۔کیُونکہ ہنُوز جِسمانی ہو۔ اِس لیے کہ جب تُم میں حَسَد اور جھگڑا ہَے تو کیا تُم جِسمانی نہ ہُوئے اور تُمھارا چَلَن اِنسانی نہیں ؟ 4 ۴۔اِس لیے کہ جب ایک کہتا ہَےکہ مَیں پَولُسؔ کا ہُوں اور دُوسرا کہ مَیں اپُلّوسؔ کا ہُوں تو کیا تُم جِسمانی نہ ہُوئے؟ 5 ۵۔پِھر پَولُسؔ کون ہَے، اور اپُلّوسؔ کون ہَے؟محْض خادِم، جِن کے وسِیلے سے تُم اِیمان لائے اور ہر ایک کی وُہی حَیثیّت ہَے جو خُداوَند نے اُسے بخشی۔ 6 ۶۔مَیں نے بویا اور اپُلّوسؔ نے پانی دِیا مگر بڑھایا خُدا نے۔ 7 ۷۔پَس نہ بونے والا کُچھ چِیز ہَےنہ پانی دینے والا مگر خُدا، جو بڑھانے والا ہَے۔ 8 ۸۔بونے والا اور پانی دینے والا دونوں ایک ہَیں لیکِن ہر شخْص اَپنی محنت کے مُوافِق اپنا اَجْر پائے گا۔ 9 ۹۔کیُونکہ ہم خُدا کے ساتھ کام کرنے والے مزدُور ہَیں۔ تُم خُدا کی کھیتی اورخُدا کی عِمارَت ہو۔ 10 ۱۰۔مَیں نے خُدا کے اُس فضْل کے مُوافِق جو مُجھ پر ہُوا، دانَا مِعْمَار کی طرح نِیو رکھّی اور دُوسرا اُسی پر تَعْمیر کرتا ہَے۔ پَس ہر ایک خبردار رہَے کہ وہ اُس پر کِس طرح تَعْمیر کرتا ہَے۔ 11 ۱۱۔ اور سِوا اُس نِیو کے جو پہلے رکھّی جا چُکی ہَے جو کہ یِسُوعؔ مسِیح ہَے، کوئی شخْص دُوسری نہیں رکھ سکتا۔ 12 ۱۲۔اَب اگر کوئی شخْص اُس نِیو پر سونے یا چاندی یا بیش قِیمَت پتھّروں یا لکڑی یا گھاس یا بھُوسے کا رَدّا رکھّے۔ 13 ۱۳۔تو اُس کا کام ظاہِر ہو جائے گا کیُونکہ وہ دِن اُسے ظاہِر کر دے گا، کیُونکہ اُس کا ظُہُور آگ کے ساتھ ہو گا اور وہ آگ خُود ہر ایک کا کام پَرَکھ لے گی کہ کیسا ہَے۔ 14 ۱۴۔جِس کِسی کی تَعْمیر کا کام اُس میں باقی رہا تو وہ اَجْر پائے گا۔ 15 ۱۵۔اور جِس کا کام جل گیا وہ نُقصَان اُٹھائے گا، لیکِن خُود بَچ جائے گامگر جلتے جلتے۔ 16 ۱۶۔کیا تُم نہیں جانتے کہ تُم خُدا کا مَقدِس ہواورخُدا کا رُوح تُم میں بسا ہُوا ہَے؟ 17 ۱۷۔اَگر کوئی خُدا کے مَقدِس کو برباد کرے گاتو خُدا اُس کو برباد کرے گاکیُونکہ خُدا کا مَقدِس پاک ہَے اور وہ تُم ہو۔ 18 ۱۸۔کوئی اپنے آپ کو فریب نہ دے۔اگر تُم میں سے کوئی اپنے آپ کو اِس جہان میں دانِش مند سمجھے تو بیوقُوف بنے تا کہ دانِش مند ہو جائے۔ 19 ۱۹۔کیُونکہ اِس دُنیا کی دانِش خُدا کے نزدِیک بے وُقُوفی ہَے۔چُنانچہ لِکھا ہَے کہ وہ حِکْمَت والوں کو اُنہی کی چالاکی میں پھنسا دیتا ہَے۔ 20 ۲۰۔اور یہ بھی کہ خُداوَند داناؤں کے تصوّرات کو جانتا ہَے کہ باطِل ہَیں۔ 21 ۲۱۔پَس کوئی شخْص اِنسانوں پر فَخْر نہ کرے ۔ کیُونکہ سب چِیزیں تُمھاری ہَیں۔ 22 ۲۲۔خواہ پَولُسؔ ، یا اَپلّوسؔ، یا کیفاؔ، خواہ اِس دُنیا کی،یا زِندگی کی، یا مَوت کی، یا حال کی یا اِستِقبال کی چِیزیں ہوں، وہ سب تُمھاری ہَیں۔ 23 ۲۳۔اور تُم مسِیح کے ہو اور مسِیح خُدا کا ہَے۔
1 ۱۔پَس آدمی ہمیں مسِیح کا خادِم اورخُدا کے بھیدوں کا مُختار سَمجھے۔ 2 ۲۔اور مُختار ہونے میں دیکھا جاتا ہَے کہ آدمی دِیانت دار پایا جائے۔ 3 ۳۔لیکِن میرے نزدِیک یہ بات نہایت چھوٹی ہَے کہ تُم یا کوئی اِنسانی عدالت مُجھے پرکھے بلکہ مَیں خُود بھی اپنے آپ کو نہیں پَرَکھتا۔ 4 ۴۔کیُونکہ میرا ضَمِیر تو مُجھے مَلامَت نہیں کرتا مگر اِس سے مَیں راست باز نہیں ٹھہرتا بلکہ میرا پَرَکھنے والا خُداوَندہَے۔ 5 ۵۔پَس خُداوَند کے آ جانے تک کوئی فیصلہ وقت سے پہلے نہ کرو۔وُہی تاریکی کی پوشیِدہ باتیں رَوْشنی میں لے آئے گااور دِلوں کے مَنصُوبے ظاہِر کر دے گا اور اُس وقت ہر ایک کی تَعرِیف خُدا کی طرف سے ہو گی۔ 6 ۶۔اور اَے بھائِیو!مَیں نے اِن باتوں میں تُمھاری خاطِر اپنا اور اَپُلّوسؔ کا ذِکر مِثال کے طور پر کِیا ہَے تا کہ تُم ہمارے وسِیلے سے یہ سِیکھو کہ لکھِے ہُوئے سے تَجاوُز نہ کرو اور ایک کی حمایت میں دُوسرے کے بَر خِلاف شیخی نہ مارو۔ 7 ۷۔تُجھ میں اور دُوسرے میں کون فرق کرتا ہَے؟اور تیرے پاس کَون سی اَیسی چِیز ہَے جو تُجھے دُوسرے سے حاصِل نہیں ہُوئی؟اور جَب تُو نے دُوسرے سے پائی تو فَخْر کیُوں کرتا ہَے کہ گویا نہیں پائی؟ 8 ۸۔تُم تو پہلے ہی سے آسُودہ ہو اور پہلے ہی سے دَولت مند ہواورتُم نے ہمارے بغیر بادشاہوں کی طرح بادشاہی کی اور کاش تُم بادشاہی کرتے تا کہ ہم بھی تُمھارے ساتھ بادشاہی کرتے! 9 ۹۔میری دانِست میں خُدا نے سب سے آخِر میں ہمیں اَیسے رَسُول ٹھہرایا ہَےجِن کے قَتْل کا حُکْم ہو چُکا ہو کیُونکہ ہم دُنیا اور فِرشتوں اور آدمِیوں کے لیے ایک تماشا ٹھہرے ۔ 10 ۱۰۔ہم مسِیح کی خاطِر بے وُقُوف ہَیں مگر تُم مسِیح میں عَقْل مَند ہو!ہم کمزور ہَیں اور تُم زور آور! تُم عِزَّت دار ہو اور ہم بے عِزَّت ہَیں! 11 ۱۱۔ہم اِس گھڑی تک بھی بھُوکے، پیاسے اور ننگے ہَیں اور مُکّے کھاتے اور دَر بہ دَر پِھرتےہَیں۔ 12 ۱۲۔اور ہم اپنے ہاتھوں سے کام کرتے اور مُشقّت اُٹھاتے ہَیں۔لوگ بُرا کہتے ہَیں،ہم دُعا دیتے ہَیں۔وہ ستاتے ہَیں ہم سہْتے ہَیں۔ 13 ۱۳۔وہ بَدنام کرتے ہَیں ہم مِنَّت سَماجَت کرتے ہَیں۔ ہم آج تک دُنیا کے کُوڑے اور سب چِیزوں کی جَھڑَن کی مانِن٘د رہَے۔ 14 ۱۴۔مَیں یہ باتیں تُمھیں شرمِندہ کرنے کے لیےنہیں لکِھتا بلکہ اپنے پیارے فرزند جان کر تُم کو نَصِیحَت کرتا ہُوں۔ 15 ۱۵۔کیُونکہ اگر مسِیح میں تُمھارے دَس ہزار اُستاد بھی ہوتے تو بھی تُمھارے بہت سے باپ نہیں ۔اِس لیے کہ مَیں ہی اِنجِیل کے وسِیلے سے مسِیح یِسُوعؔ میں تُمھارا باپ بنا۔ 16 ۱۶۔پَس مَیں تُمھاری مِنّت کرتا ہُوں کہ میری مانِن٘د بنو۔ 17 ۱۷۔اِسی وجہ سے مَیں نے تیِمُتھِیُسؔ کو تُمھارے پاس بھیجا۔ وہ خُداوَند میں میرا پیارا اور دِیانت دار فرزند ہَے اور میرے اُن طریقوں کو جو مسِیح میں ہَیں تُمھیں یاد دِلائے گا جِس طرح مَیں ہر جگہ ہر کلِیسِیا میں تَعلِیم دیتا ہُوں۔ 18 ۱۸۔بعض اِس خیال سے شیخی مارتے ہَیں کہ گویا مَیں تُمھارے پاس آنے ہی کا نہیں ۔ 19 ۱۹۔لیکِن اگر خُداوَند نے چاہا تو مَیں جَلد تُمھارے پاس آؤُں گا،اور اُن کی شیِخی کی باتوں کو نہیں بلکہ اُن کی قُدرت کو معلُوم کروُں گا۔ 20 ۲۰۔کیُونکہ خُدا کی بادشاہی باتوں پر نہیں بلکہ قُدرت پر مَوقُوف ہَے۔ 21 ۲۱۔تُمھاری مَرضی کیا ہَے؟ کیا مَیں چَھڑی لے کر تُمھارے پاس آؤں یا مُحَبَّت اور نرم مَزاجی سے؟
1 ۱۔دَراَصْل یہ عام سُننے میں ہَے کہ تُمھارے درمیان حَرام کاری ہوتی ہَے، وہ بھی ایسی کہ غیر قوموں میں بھی نہ ہوتی ہو یعنی کہ کوئی شخْص اپنے باپ کی بِیوی رکھتا ہَے! 2 ۲۔اور تُم اِس بات پر غم کرنے کی بجائے اور جِس نے ایسا کام کیا ہَے اُسے اپنے درمیان سے نِکال دینے کی بجائے پھُولے پِھرتے ہو۔ 3 ۳۔مَیں اگرچہ جِسْم کے اِعتِبار سے غیر حاضِر ہُوں مگر رُوح کے اِعتِبار سے مَوجُود ہُوں، گویا مَوجُودگی ہی میں اَیسا کام کرنے والے کے لیے فیصلہ دے چُکا ہُوں۔ 4 ۴۔ جَب تُم خُداوَند یِسُوعؔ مسِیح کے نام میں اِکَٹّھے ہو اور مَیں اپنی رُوح میں خُداوَند یِسُوعؔ کی قُدرت کے وسِیلے تُمھارے ساتھ ہُوں۔ 5 ۵۔ہم اَیسےشخص کو جِسْم کی ہلاکت کے لیے شیطان کے حوالے کرتے ہَیں تاکہ اُس کی رُوح خُداوَند کے دِن بچ جائے۔ 6 ۶۔تُمھارا فَخْر کرنا خُوب نہیں ۔ کیا تُم نہیں جانتے کہ ذرا سا خمِیر گُندھے ہُوئے سارے آٹے کو خمِیر کر دیتا ہَے؟ 7 ۷۔پُرانا خمِیر نِکال دو تا کہ تُم تازہ گُندھا ہُوا آٹا بن جاؤ، چُناچہ تُم بے خمِیر ہو۔کیُونکہ ہمارا بھی فَسْح یعنی مسِیح قُربان ہُوا ہَے۔ 8 ۸۔پَس آؤ ہم عیِد کریں۔پُرانے خمِیر سے نہیں اور نہ ہی بَدی اور شَرارَت کے خمِیر سے بلکہ صاف دِلی اور سچّائی کی بے خمِیر روٹی سے۔ 9 ۹۔مَیں نے اپنے خَط میں تُم کو لکِھا تھا کہ حَرام کاروں کے ساتھ میل جول مَت رکھّو۔ 10 ۱۰۔اِس سے میری مُراد اِس دُنیا کے حَرام کار یا لالچی اور ظالِم یا بُت پرست ہرگز نہیں کیُونکہ ایسی صُورت میں تو تُمھیں اِس دُنیا ہی سے نِکل جانا پڑتا۔ 11 ۱۱۔مگر اَب تُم کو یہ لکِھتا ہُوں کہ اگر کوئی شخْص بھائی کہلاتا ہو لیکِن حَرام کار یا لالچی یا بُت پرست یا گالِیاں دینے والا یا شَرابی یا ظالِم ہو تو اَیسےشخص سے میل جول نہ رکھنا۔بلکہ اَیسےشخص کے ساتھ کھانا تک نہ کھانا۔ 12 ۱۲۔کیُونکہ مُجھے باہَر والوں کی عَدالت کرنے سے کیا واسطہ؟ کیا تُم بھی اَندر والوں کا اِنصاف نہیں کرتے؟ 13 ۱۳۔مگر باہَر والوں کی عَدالت خُدا ہی کرے گا۔پَس اُس بُرے شخْص کو اپنے درمیان سے نِکال دو۔
1 ۱۔کیا تُم میں سے کِسی کو یہ جُرأت ہَے کہ جب دُوسرے کے ساتھ قانُونی مُعاملہ ہو تو فیصلے کے لیے مُقَدّسوں کے پاس جانے کی بجائے بے دیِنوں کے پاس جائے؟ 2 ۲۔یا کیا تُم نہیں جانتے کہ مُقَدّس لوگ دُنیا کا اِنصاف کریں گے؟ پَس جب دُنیا کا اِنصاف بھی تُمھیں ہی کرنا ہَے تو کیا تُم چھوٹے چھوٹے جھگڑوں کے فیصلے کرنے کے لائق نہیں ہو؟ 3 ۳۔کیا تُم نہیں جانتے کہ ہم فِرشتوں کا اِنصاف کریں گے؟ تو کیا ہم دُنیَوی مُعامَلات کے فیصلے نہ کریں؟ 4 ۴۔پَس اگر تُم میں عام دُنیَوی مُقدمات ہوں تو کیا اُنھیں مُنصِف ٹھہراؤ گے جو کلِیسِیا میں حقیِر سَمجھے جاتے ہَیں؟ 5 ۵۔مَیں تُمھیں شرمِندہ کرنے کے لیے یہ کہتا ہُوں!کیا واقعی تُم میں ایک بھی عَقْلمَند نہیں ؟کیا کوئی ایک بھی نہیں جو اپنے بھائِیوں کے مُقدّمہ کا فیصلہ کر سکے؟ 6 ۶۔بلکہ بھائی کے خِلاف بھائی مُقدّمہ کرتا ہَےاور وہ بھی بے دِینوں کے آگے۔ 7 ۷۔بلکہ دَراصْل تُم میں بڑا نَقْص یہ ہَے کہ آپَس میں مُقدّمہ بازی کرتے ہو۔ ظُلْم اُٹھانا کیُوں نہیں بہتر جانتے؟ اپنا نُقصان کیُوں قبُول نہیں کرتے؟ 8 ۸۔بلکہ تُم ہی ظُلْم کرتے اور نُقصان پہنچاتے ہو۔ اور وہ بھی بھائِیوں کو۔ 9 ۹۔کیا تُم جانتے نہیں کہ بَدکار خُدا کی بادشاہی کے وارِث نہ ہوں گے؟فریب نہ کھاؤ۔ نہ حَرام کار خُدا کی بادشاہی کے وارِث ہوں گے نہ بُت پرست نہ زِنا کار نہ عیاش۔ نہ لَونڈے باز۔ 10 ۱۰۔نہ چور نہ لالچی نہ نَشہ باز نہ شَرابی۔ نہ گالِیاں بَکنے والے نہ ظالِم ۔ 11 ۱۱۔اور تُم میں سے بعض اَیسے تھے بھی ۔مگر تُم خُداوَند یِسُوعؔ مسِیح کے نام سے اور ہمارے خُدا کے رُوح سے دُھل گَئے اور پاک ہُوئے اور راست باز بھی ٹھہرے۔ 12 ۱۲۔”سب چِیزیں میرے لیے رَوا تو ہَیں“، مگر سب چِیزیں مُفِید نہیں ۔”سب چِیزیں میرے لیے رَوا تو ہَیں“،لیکِن مَیں کِسی چِیز کا پابند نہ ہُوں گا۔ 13 ۱۳۔”کھانے پیٹ کے لیے ہَیں اور پیٹ کھانوں کے لیے“،لیکِن خُدا اُس کو اور اِن کو نیست کرے گا۔مگر بدَن حَرام کاری کے لیے نہیں بلکہ خُداوَند کے لیے ہَے اور خُداوَند بدَن کے لیے۔ 14 ۱۴۔اور خُدا نے خُداوَند کو بھی جِلایا اور ہم کو بھی اپنی قُدرت سے جِلائے گا۔ 15 ۱۵۔کیا تُم نہیں جانتے کہ تُمھارے بدَن مسِیح کے اَعضا ہَیں؟پَس کیا مَیں مسِیح کے اَعضا لے کر کِسی کَسبی کے اَعضا بناؤں؟ہرگِز نہیں ۔ 16 ۱۶۔کیا تُم نہیں جانتے کہ جو کوئی کَسبی سے صُحبَت کرتا ہَے وہ اُس کے ساتھ ایک تَن ہوتا ہَے؟ کیُونکہ وہ فرماتا ہَے کہ وہ دونوں ایک تَن ہوں گے۔ 17 ۱۷۔اور جو خُداوَند کی صُحبَت میں رہتا ہَے وہ اُس کے ساتھ ایک رُوح ہوتا ہَے۔ 18 ۱۸۔حَرام کاری سے بھاگو۔ آدمی جِتنے گُناہ کرتا ہَے وہ بدَن سے باہَر ہَیں مگر حَرام کار اپنے ہی بدَن کا گُنہگار ہَے ۔ 19 ۱۹۔کیا تُم نہیں جانتے کہ تُمھارا بدَن رُوح القُدُس کا مَقدِس ہَے جو تُم میں بَسا ہُوا ہَے اور تُمھیں خُدا کی طرف سے حاصِل ہَے ؟اور یہ کہ تُم اپنے نہیں ہو۔ 20 ۲۰۔اِس لیے کہ قِیمت سے خرِیدے گَئے ہو؟پَس اپنے بدَن سے خُدا کا جلال ظاہِر کرو۔
1 ۱۔اَب وہ مُعامَلات جِن کی بابَت تُم نے مُجھے لِکھا تھا؛ تو مرْد کے لیے اچھا ہَے کہ عَورت کو نہ چُھوئے۔ 2 ۲۔لیکِن حَرام کاری کے اندیشے سے ہر مَرد اپنی بِیوی اور ہر بِیوی اپنا شوہر رکھّے ۔ 3 ۳۔شوہر بِیوی کا حَق ادا کرے اور وَیسا ہی بِیوی شوہر کا۔ 4 ۴۔بِیوی اپنے بدَن کی مُختار نہیں بلکہ شوہر ہَے ۔ اِسی طرح شوہر بھی اپنے بدَن کا مُختار نہیں بلکہ بِیوی ہَے۔ 5 ۵۔ تُم ایک دُوسرے کی حَق تلفی نہ کرو مگر تھوڑی مُدّت تک آپَس کی رضا مَندی سے دُعا کے واسطے فُرصت پاؤ اور پِھر اِکٹھّے ہو جاؤ۔ایسا نہ ہو کہ غلبٔہ نَفس کے سبب سے شیطان تُم کو آزمائے۔ 6 ۶۔لیکِن مَیں یہ بات اِجازت کے طور پر کہتا ہُوں نہ کہ حُکْم کے طور پر۔ 7 ۷۔اور مَیں تو چاہتا ہُوں کہ سب آدمی ویسے ہوں جیسا مَیں ہُوں۔ لیکِن ہر شخْص کو خُدا کی طرف سے خاص نِعمَت مِلی ہَے، کِسی کوایک طرح کی اورکِسی کو دُوسری طرح کی۔ 8 ۸۔پَس مَیں بے بیاہوں اور بیواؤں کی بابَت کہتا ہُوں کہ اُن کے لیے اَیسا ہی رہنا اچھا ہَے جیسے مَیں ہُوں۔ 9 ۹۔لیکِن اگر ضبْط نہ کر سکیں تو جِنسی خواہش کی آگ میں جلنے کی نِسبت بہتر ہو گا کہ وہ شادی کر لیں۔ 10 ۱۰۔لیکِن جِن کا بیاہ ہو چُکا اُنہیں مَیں حُکْم دیتا ہُوں،مَیں نہیں بلکہ خُداوَند حُکْم دیتا ہَے کہ بِیوی اپنے شوہر کو نہ چھوڑے۔ 11 ۱۱۔(لیکِن اگر چھوڑے تویا بے نِکاح رہَے، یا اپنے شوہر سے پِھر مِلاپ کر لے)اور شوہر اپنی بِیوی کو نہ چھوڑے۔ 12 ۱۲۔اور باقِیوں سے مَیں کہتاہُوں، خُداوَندنہیں بلکہ مَیں ہی کہتا ہُوں کہ اگر کِسی بھائی کی بِیوی بااِیمان نہ ہو اور اُس کے ساتھ رہنے کو راضی ہو وہ اُسے نہ چھوڑے۔ 13 ۱۳۔اور جِس عَورت کا شوہر با اِیمان نہ ہو اور اُس کے ساتھ رہنے کو راضی ہو تو وہ شوہر کو نہ چھوڑے۔ 14 ۱۴۔کیُونکہ جو شوہر با اِیمان نہ ہو وہ بِیوی کے سبب سے پاک ٹھہرتا ہَےاور جو بِیوی با اِیمان نہ ہووہ اپنے بااِیمان شوہر کے سبب سے پاک ٹھہرتی ہَے۔ ورنہ تُمھارے فرزند ناپاک ہوتے مگر اَب پاک ہَیں۔ 15 ۱۵۔لیکِن اگر بے اِیمان جُدا ہونا چاہَے تو اُسے جُدا ہونے دو۔ ایسی حالت میں کوئی بھائی یا بہن پابند نہیں ۔ بلکہ خُدا نے ہمیں میل مِلاپ کے لیے بُلایا ہَے۔ 16 ۱۶۔کیُونکہ اَے بِیوی تُجھے کیا خبر کہ شاید تُو اپنے شوہر کو بَچَا لے؟اوراَے مَرْد تُجھے کیا خبر کہ شاید تُو اپنی بِیوی کو بَچَا لے؟ 17 ۱۷۔مگر جَیسا خُداوَند نے ہر ایک کو جِس قَدْر حِصّہ دِیا ہَےاورخُدا نے ہر ایک کو بُلایا ہَے اُسی طرح وہ چلے ۔ اور مَیں تَمام کلِیسِیاؤں کو یہی تجویز کرتا ہُوں۔ 18 ۱۸۔اگر کوئی مَختُون بُلایا گیا تھا؟تو وہ نامَختُون نہ بنے ۔ اگر کوئی نامَختُون بُلایا گیا ہَے؟ وہ مَختُون نہ بنے ۔ 19 ۱۹۔ نہ خَتنہ کوئی چِیز ہَے نہ نامَختُونی ۔بلکہ خُدا کے حُکْموں پر چلنا ہی سب کُچھ ہَے۔ 20 ۲۰۔ہرایک شخْص جِس حالت میں بُلایا گیا تھا اُسی میں رہَے ۔ 21 ۲۱۔کیا تُجھے غُلامی کی حالت میں بُلایا گیا تھا؟ تُو اِس کی فِکْر نہ کر۔ لیکِن اگر تُو آزاد ہو سکے تو اِسی کو اِختِیار کر۔ 22 ۲۲۔کیُونکہ جو شخْص غُلامی کی حالت میں خُداوَند میں بُلایا گیا ہَے وہ خُداوَند کا آزاد کِیا ہُؤا ہَے۔اور اِسی طرح وہ آزاد جو بُلایا گیا ہَے مسِیح کا غُلام ہَے۔ 23 ۲۳۔تُم قِیمت سے خرِیدے گَئے ہو۔ آدمِیوں کے غُلام نہ بنو۔ 24 ۲۴۔اَے بھائِیو!جو کوئی جِس حالت میں بُلایا گیا ہو وہ اُسی حالت میں خُدا کے ساتھ رہَے۔ 25 ۲۵۔کُن٘واریوں کی بابَت میرے پاس خُداوَند کا کوئی حُکْم نہیں لیکِن خُداوَند کی طرف سے مُجھ پر دِیانت دار ہونے کے لیے جیسا رَحْم ہُوا ویِسی ہی مَیں رائے دیتا ہُوں۔ 26 ۲۶۔پَس مُتوقع بُحران کے پیشِ نظر میری رائے میں بہتر یہی ہَے کہ آدمی جیسا ہَے ویسا ہی رہَے۔ 27 ۲۷۔اگر تُو بِیوی کے ساتھ نِکاح میں ہَے تو اُس سے جُدا ہونے کی کوشِش نہ کراور اگر تُو بِیوی کےبندھن سے آزاد ہَے تو بِیوی کی تلاش نہ کر۔ 28 ۲۸۔لیکِن اگر تُو بِیاہ کر لے تو گُناہ نہیں ۔ اور اگر کُن٘واری بِیاہ کرے تو اُس نے گُناہ نہیں کِیا۔مگر اَیسےلوگ جِسمانی تکلیف پائیں گے اور مَیں تو تُمھیں بچانا چاہتا ہُوں۔ 29 ۲۹۔مگر اَےبھائِیو! مَیں یہ کہتا ہُوں کہ وقت تنگ ہَے۔ پَس آگے کو چاہیے کہ بِیوی والے اَیسےہوں کہ گویا اُن کے بِیویاں نہیں ۔ 30 ۳۰۔اور رونے والے اَیسے ہوں گویا نہیں روتے اورخُوشی کرنے والے اَیسےہوں گویا خُوشی نہیں کرتے اور خرِیدنے والے اَیسے ہوں گویا مال نہیں رکھتے۔ 31 ۳۱۔اوردُنیَوی کاروبار کرنے والے اَیسےہوں کہ دُنیا ہی کے نہ ہو رہَیں کیُونکہ دُنیا کی شکْل بدلتی جاتی ہَے۔ 32 ۳۲۔پَس مَیں یہ چاہتا ہُوں کہ تُم بے فِکْر رہو۔بے بیاہا شخْص خُداوَند کی باتوں کی فِکْر میں رہتا ہَے کہ کِس طرح خُداوَند کو راضی رکھّے۔ 33 ۳۳۔مگر بِیاہا ہُوا شخْص دُنیا کی چِیزوں کی فِکْر میں رہتا ہَے کہ کِس طرح اپنی بِیوی کو راضی رکھّے۔ 34 ۳۴۔بِیاہی اور کُن٘واری میں بھی فرق ہَے۔کُن٘واری خُداوَند کی باتوں کی فِکْر میں رہتی ہَے تا کہ اپنے جِسْم اوررُوح دونوں میں پاک ہو۔ مگر بِیاہی ہُوئی عَورت دُنیا کی چِیزوں کی فِکْر میں رہتی ہَے تا کہ کِسی طرح اپنے شوہر کو خُوش کرے۔ 35 ۳۵۔اورمَیں یہ بات تُمھارے فائِدے کے لیے کہتا ہُوں نہ کہ تُمھیں پابند بنانے کے لیے،بلکہ اِس لیے کہ جو کام زیبا ہَے وہی عَمَل میں آئے اورتُم خُداوَند کی خِدمت میں بے وَسوَسہ مَشغُول رہو۔ 36 ۳۶۔اور اگر کوئی یہ سَمجھے کہ مَیں اپنی اُس کُن٘واری لڑکی کی حَق تلفی کر رہا ہُوں جِس کی جوانی ڈَھل چلی ہَےاور ضُرورت بھی معلُوم ہو تو اِختِیار ہَے۔ اِس میں گُناہ نہیں ۔ وہ اُس کا بِیاہ ہونے دے۔ 37 ۳۷۔مگر جو اپنے دِل میں پُختہ ہو اور اِس کی کُچھ ضرُورت نہ ہو بلکہ اپنے اِرادے کی تکمِیل کی صَواَبدِید رکھّتا ہواور دِل میں ٹھان لے کہ مَیں اپنی لڑکی کو کُن٘واری ہی رکھّوں گا تو وہ اچھا کرتا ہَے۔ 38 ۳۸۔پَس جو اپنی کُن٘واری لڑکی کو بِیاہ دیتا ہَے وہ اچھا کرتا ہَےاور جو نہیں بِیاہتا وہ اور بھی اچھا کرتا ہَے۔ 39 ۳۹۔جب تک عَورت کا شوہر جِیتا ہَے وہ شرع کے مُطابِق اُس کی پابند ہَے ۔ پر جب اُس کا شوہر مَر جائے تو جِس سے چاہَے بِیاہ کر سکتی ہَے مگر صِرف خُداوَند میں۔ 40 ۴۰۔مگر جَیسی ہَے اگر وَیسی ہی رہَے تو میری رائے میں زِیادہ خُوش نَصِیب ہَےاور مَیں سمجھتا ہُوں کہ خُدا کا رُوح مُجھ میں بھی ہَے۔
1 ۱۔اَب بُتوں کی قُربانِیوں کی بابَت یہ ہَے کہ ہم جانتے ہَیں کہ ہم سب عِلْم رکھتے ہَیں۔عِلْم غرُور پَیدا کرتا ہَےلیکِن مُحّبت ترقّی کا باعِث ہَے۔ 2 ۲۔اور اگر کوئی گُمان کرے کہ مَیں کُچھ جانتا ہُوں تو جَیسا جاننا چاہیے وَیسا اَب تک نہیں جانتا۔ 3 ۳۔لیکِن اگر کوئی خُدا سے مُحَبَّت رکھتا ہَے تو خُدا اُسے جانتا ہے۔ 4 ۴۔پَس بُتوں کو نَذر کی گَئی چِیزیں کھانے کی نِسبت ہم جانتے ہَیں کہ بُت دُنیا میں کُچھ چِیز نہیں اور سِوا ایک کے اور کوئی خُدا نہیں ۔ 5 ۵۔ اگرچہ خواہ آسمان یا زمِین پر اَیسےکئی ہَیں جو خُدا کہلاتے ہَیں (چُنانچہ یُوں تو بُہتیرے خُدا اور بُہتیرے خُداوَند ہَیں)۔ 6 ۶۔لیکِن ہمارے نزدِیک تو صِرف ایک ہی خُداہَے یعنی باپ جِس کی طرف سے سب چِیزیں ہَیں۔ اور ہم بھی اُسی میں ہَیں ۔اور ایک ہی خُداوَندہَے یعنی یِسُوعؔ مسِیح جِس کے وسِیلے سے سب چِیزیں مَوجوُد ہُوئیں اور ہم بھی اُسی کے وسِیلے سے ہَیں۔ 7 ۷۔لیکِن سب کو یہ عِلْم نہیں ۔ بلکہ بعض جِنھیں اَب تک بُت پرستی کی عادَت ہَے وہ اُن چِیزوں کو بُتوں کی قُربانی جان کر کھاتے ہَیں اور اُن کا ضمِیر کمزور ہونے کے سبب سے آلوُدہ ہوتا جاتا ہَے۔ 8 ۸۔کھانا ہمیں خُدا سے نہیں مِلائے گا۔ اگر نہ کھائیں تو ہمارا کُچھ نُقصان نہیں ۔اور اگر کھائیں تو کُچھ نَفْع نہیں ۔ 9 ۹۔لیکِن ہوشیار رہو! اَیسا نہ ہو کہ تُمھاری یہ آزادی کمزوروں کے لیے ٹھوکر کا باعِث ہوجائے۔ 10 ۱۰۔کیُونکہ اگر کوئی تُجھ صاحبِ عِلْم کو بُت خانے میں کھانا کھاتے دیکھے اور وہ کمزور شخْص ہو تو کیا اُس کا دِل بُتوں کی قُربانی کھانے پر دلیر نہ ہو جائے گا؟ 11 ۱۱۔غَرَض تیرے عِلْم کے سبب سے وہ کمزور شخْص یعنی وہ بھائی جِس کی خاطِر مسِیح مُؤا، ہلاک ہو جائے گا۔ 12 ۱۲۔پَس تُم اِس طرح بھائِیوں کے گُنہگار ہو کر اور اُن کے کمزور ضمِیر کو گھایل کر کے مسِیح کے گُنہگار ٹھہرتے ہو۔ 13 ۱۳۔اِس سبب سے اَگر کھانا میرے بھائی کو ٹھوکر کھِلائے تو جَب تک دُنیا قائِم ہَے مَیں ہر گز گوشت نہ کھاؤُں گا تا کہ اپنے بھائی کے لیے ٹھوکر کا باعِث نہ بَنُوں۔
1 ۱۔کیا مَیں آزاد نہیں ؟ کیا مَیں رَسُول نہیں ؟ کیا مَیں نے یِسُوعؔ مسِیح کو نہیں دیکھا جو ہمارا خُداوَند ہَے؟ کیا تُم خُداوَند میں میری محنَت نہیں ہو؟ 2 ۲۔ اگر مَیں اَوروں کے لیے رَسُول نہیں تو بھی تُمھارے لیے تو بے شک ہُوں کیُونکہ تُم خُداوَند میں میری رسالت پر مُہر ہو۔ 3 ۳۔جو میرا اِمتِحان کرتےہَیں اُن کے لیے میرا جواب یہی ہَے۔ 4 ۴۔کیا ہمیں کھانے پِینے کا اِختِیار نہیں ؟ 5 ۵۔ کیا ہمیں یہ اِختِیار نہیں کہ کِسی اِیمان دار بہن، بِیوی کو ساتھ لیے پِھریں جَیسا دُوسرے رَسُول اورخُداوَند کے بھائی اور کیفاؔ کرتے ہَیں؟ 6 ۶۔یا صِرف مُجھے اور بَرنَباسؔ کو ہی محنت مُشقّت سے باز رہنے کا اِختِیار نہیں ؟ 7 ۷۔کون سا سِپاہی اپنے خرچ پر جنگ کرنے جاتا ہَے؟ کون تاکِستان لگا کر اُس کا پَھل نہیں کھاتا؟یا کون گلّہ چَرا کر اُس گلّے کا دُودھ نہیں پِیتا؟ 8 ۸۔کیا مَیں یہ باتیں محْض اِنسانی قیاس ہی کے مُوافِق کہتا ہُوں۔ کیا تورَیت بھی یہی نہیں کہتی؟ 9 ۹۔چُنانچہ مُوسیٰؔ کی شرِیعت میں لِکھا ہَے کہ کھلیان میں چلتے بَیل کا مُنہ نہ باندھنا۔کیا خُدا کو بَیلوں کی فِکْر ہَے؟ 10 ۱۰۔یاوہ خاص ہمارے واسطے یُوں کہتا ہَے؟ ہاں یہ ہمارے واسطے لکِھا گیا ہَے کیُونکہ مُناسِب ہَے کہ جوتنے والا اُمّید پر جوتے اور گاہنے والا حِصّہ پانے کی اُمّید پر گاہَے۔ 11 ۱۱۔پَس اگر ہم نے تُمھارے لیے رُوحانی چِیزیں بوئی ہَیں تو کیا یہ کوئی بڑی بات ہَے کہ ہم تُمھاری جِسمانی چِیزوں کی فَصْل کاٹیں؟ 12 ۱۲۔جب اَوروں کا تُم پر یہ اِختِیار ہَے تو کیا ہمارا اِس سے زیادہ نہ ہو گا؟ لیکِن ہم نے اِس اِختِیار سے کام نہیں لِیا بلکہ ہر چِیز کی برداشت کرتے ہَیں تا کہ ہم مسِیح کی خُوش خبری میں رُکاوٹ کا باعِث نہ ہوں۔ 13 ۱۳۔کیا تُم نہیں جانتے کہ جو مُقَدّس چِیزوں کی خِدمت کرتے ہَیں وہ ہَیکل سے کھاتے ہَیں؟ اور جو قُربان گاہ کے خِدمت گُذار ہَیں وہ قُربان گاہ کے ساتھ حِصّہ پاتے ہَیں؟ 14 ۱۴۔اِسی طرح خُداوَند نے بھی مُقَرّر کِیا ہَے کہ خُوش خبری سُنانے والے خُوش خبری کے وسِیلے سے گُزارہ کریں۔ 15 ۱۵۔لیکِن مَیں نے اِن میں سے کِسی بات پر عَمَل نہیں کِیا اور نہ اِس غَرَض سے یہ لِکھا ہَےکہ میرے واسطے اَیسا کِیا جائے۔ کیُونکہ میرا مَرنا ہی اِس سے بِہتر ہَے کہ کوئی میرے فَخْر کو ضائع کر دے۔ 16 ۱۶۔اگر مَیں خُوش خبری کی مُنادی کروُں تو میرا کُچھ فَخْر نہیں کیُونکہ یہ تو میرے لیے ضرُوری ہَے۔اور مُجھ پر اَفسوس! اگر مَیں خُوش خبری نہ سُناؤُں۔ 17 ۱۷۔کیُونکہ اگر مَیں یہ خُوشی سے کرُوں تو میرا اَجْر ہَے لیکِن اگر مجبُوری سے کرُوں تو مُختاری میرے سپُرد ہُوئی ہَے۔ 18 ۱۸۔پَس مُجھے کیا اَجْر مِلتا ہَے؟یہ کہ جب اِنجِیل کی مُنادی کرُوں تو خُوش خبری کو مُفْت کر دُوں تا کہ جو اِختِیار مُجھے خُوش خبری کے بارے میں حاصِل ہَے اِس کا ناجائز اِستِعمال نہ کرُوں۔ 19 ۱۹۔اگرچہ مَیں سب لوگوں سے آزاد ہُوں پِھر بھی مَیں نے اپنے آپ کو سب کا غُلام بنا دِیا ہَے تا کہ اَور بھی زِیادہ لوگوں کو کھینچ لاؤں۔ 20 ۲۰۔مَیں یہُودِیوں کے درمِیان یہُودِیوں جیسا بَنا تا کہ یہُودِیوں کو کھینچ لاؤں۔ جو لوگ شرِیعت کے ماتحت ہَیں اُن کے لیے مَیں شرِیعت کے ماتحت جَیسا بَنا تا کہ شرِیعت کے ماتحتوں کو کھینچ لاؤں، اگرچہ خُود شرِیعت کے ماتحت نہیں ہُوں۔ 21 ۲۱۔بے شرع لوگوں کے لیے بے شرع بَنا تا کہ بے شرع لوگوں کو کھینچ لاؤں (اگرچہ خُدا کے نزدِیک بے شرع نہ تھا بلکہ مسِیح کی شرِیعت کے تابع تھا)۔ 22 ۲۲۔کمزوروں کے لیے کمزور بَنا تا کہ کمزوروں کو حاصِل کر سَکُوں۔مَیں سب آدمِیوں کے لیے سب کُچھ بنا ہُوا ہُوں تا کہ کِسی طرح سے بعض کو بچا سَکُوں۔ 23 ۲۳۔مَیں یہ سب کُچھ اِنجِیل کی خاطِر کرتا ہُوں تا کہ اَوروں کے ساتھ شرِیک ہُوؤں۔ 24 ۲۴۔کیا تُم نہیں جانتے کہ دَوڑ کے مَیدان میں دَوڑنے والے تو سب ہی ہَیں مگر اِنعام ایک ہی پاتا ہَے۔پَس اَیسے دَوڑو کہ تُم ہی جِیتو۔ 25 ۲۵۔اور ہر پہلوان سب طرح کا پرہیز کرتا ہَے۔ اَب وہ تو مُرجھانے والا سہرا پانے کے لیے یہ کرتے ہَیں مگر ہم اُس سہرے کے لیے کرتے ہَیں جو مُرجھانے کا نہیں ۔ 26 ۲۶۔پَس مَیں بھی اِسی طرح دَوڑتا ہُوں مگر بے یقِینی سے نہیں ۔اوراُس مُکّے باز کی طرح نہیں لڑتا جو ہَوا میں مُکّے چلاتا ہَے۔ 27 ۲۷۔بلکہ مَیں اپنے بدَن کو مارتا پِیٹتا اور اُسے قابُو میں رکھتا ہُوں، اَیسا نہ ہو کہ اَوروں میں مُنادی کر کے آپ نامَقبُول ٹھہرُؤں۔
1 ۱۔پَس اَےبھائِیو! مَیں نہیں چاہتا کہ تُم اِس بات سے لاعِلْم رہو کہ ہمارے باپ دادا سب بادِل کے نیچِے تھے اور سب کے سب سَمَندر میں سے گُزر کر گَئے۔ 2 ۲۔ اور سب ہی نے اُس بادَل اور سَمَندر میں مُوسیٰ کا بَپتِسمہ لِیا۔ 3 ۳۔اور سب نے ایک ہی رُوحانی خُوراک کھائی۔ 4 ۴۔اور سب نے ایک ہی رُوحانی پانی پیِا کیُونکہ وہ اُس رُوحانی چٹان میں سے پِیتے تھے جو اُن کے ساتھ ساتھ چلتی تھی اور وہ چٹان مسِیح تھا۔ 5 ۵۔ مگر خُدا اُن میں سے زیادہ تَر سے راضی نہ ہُوا۔ چُنانچہ وہ بَیابان میں ڈھیر ہو گَئے۔ 6 ۶۔یہ باتیں ہمارے واسطے عِبرت ٹھہریں تا کہ ہم بُری چِیزوں کی خواہِش نہ کریں جَیسے اُنھوں نے کی۔ 7 ۷۔اور تُم بُت پرَست نہ بنو جِس طرح اُن میں سے کئی ایک بن گَئے تھے۔چُنانچہ لکِھا ہَے کہ لوگ کھانے پِینے کو بَیٹھے۔ پِھر ناچنے کُودنے کو اُٹھے۔ 8 ۸۔اور ہم حرام کاری نہ کریں جِس طرح اُن میں سے بَعض نے کی اور ایک ہی دِن میں تَیئِس ہزار مارے گَئے۔ 9 ۹۔اور ہم مسِیح کی آزمائِش نہ کریں جَیسے اُن میں سے بعض نے کی اور سانپوں نے اُنہیں ہلاک کِیا۔ 10 ۱۰۔اور تُم مَت بُڑبُڑاؤ جِس طرح اُن میں سے بعض بُڑبُڑائے اور ہلاک کرنے والے کے ہاتھوں ہلاک کیے گَئے۔ 11 ۱۱۔اُن پر یہ باتیں عِبرت کے لیے واقع ہُوئیں اور ہم آخری زمانہ والوں کی نَصِیحَت کے واسطے لِکھی گَئیں۔ 12 ۱۲۔پَس جو کوئی اپنے آپ کو قائِم سمجھتا ہَے وہ خبردار رہَے کہ گِر نہ پڑے۔ 13 ۱۳۔تُم کِسی ایسی آزمائِش میں نہیں پڑے جو دُوسروں پر کبھی نہ آئی ہو۔ لیکِن خُدا وفادار ہَے۔ وہ تُمھیں تُمھاری برداشت سے زیادہ آزمائِش میں پڑنے نہ دے گا بلکہ آزمائِش کے ساتھ نِکلنے کی راہ بھی پَیدا کر دے گا تا کہ تُم برداشت کر سکو۔ 14 ۱۴۔لِہٰذا اَے میرے پیارو! بُت پرستی سے بھاگو۔ 15 ۱۵۔مَیں تُمھیں عَقْل مَند جان کر ہم کلام ہُوں۔ پَس جو مَیں کہتا ہُوں تُم آپ اُسے پرکھو۔ 16 ۱۶۔برکت کا وہ پِیالہ جِس پر ہم برکت چاہتے ہَیں کیا وہ مسِیح کے خُون کی شِراکت نہیں ؟ وہ روٹی جو ہم توڑتے ہَیں کیا مسِیح کے بدَن کی شِراکت نہیں ؟ 17 ۱۷۔چُونکہ روٹی ایک ہی ہَے، اِس لیے ہم جو بہت سے ہَیں ایک بدَن ہَیں کیُونکہ ہم سب اُسی ایک روٹی میں شرِیک ہوتے ہَیں۔ 18 ۱۸۔اُن پر نظر کرو جو جِسْم کے اِعتِبار سے اِسرائیلی ہَیں۔کیا قُربانی کا گوشت کھانے والے قُربان گاہ کے شرِیک نہیں ؟ 19 ۱۹۔پَس کیا میرے کہنے کا یہ مطلب ہَے کہ بُتوں کی قُربانی کوئی چِیز ہَے، یا بُت کُچھ چِیز ہَے؟ 20 ۲۰۔نہیں ۔بلکہ یہ کہ جو قُربانی غَیر قَومیں گُزرانتی ہَیں وہ شَیاطِین کے لیے ہَیں نہ کہ خُدا کے لیے۔اور مَیں نہیں چاہتا کہ تُم شَیاطِین کے شرِیک ہو۔ 21 ۲۱۔ تُم خُداوَند کے پیالے اور شَیاطِین کے پیالے دونوں میں سےنہیں پی سکتے۔خُداوَند کے دستَر خوان اور شَیاطِین کے دستَر خوان دونوں میں شریک نہیں ہو سکتے۔ 22 ۲۲۔کیا ہم خُداوَند کی غَیرت کو جوش دِلاتے ہَیں؟ کیا ہم اُس سے زور آور ہَیں؟ 23 ۲۳۔سب چِیزیں رَوا تو ہَیں مگر سب چِیزیں مُفِید نہیں ۔سب چِیزیں رَوا تو ہَیں مگر ہر بات سب کی ترقی کا باعِث نہیں ہوتی۔ 24 ۲۴۔کوئی اپنی بہتری نہ ڈُھونڈے بلکہ دُوسرے کی۔ 25 ۲۵۔جو کُچھ قَصّـابوں کی دُکانوں میں بِکتا ہَے وہ کھاؤ اور دِینی تَجَسُّس کے سبب سے کُچھ نہ پُوچھو۔ 26 ۲۶۔کیُونکہ زمِین اور اُس کی مَعمُوری خُداوَند کی ہَے۔ 27 ۲۷۔اگر بے اِیمانوں میں سے کوئی تُمھاری دَعوَت کرے اور تُم جانے پر راضی ہو تو جو کُچھ تُمھارے آگے رکھّا جائے اُسے کھاؤ اور دیِنی تَجَسُّس کے سبب سے کُچھ نہ پُوچھو۔ 28 ۲۸۔لیکِن اگر کوئی تُم سے کہَے کہ یہ بُتوں کی قُربانی کا گوشت ہَے تو اُس کے جَتا دینے اور دیِنی اِمتیاز کے سبب سے نہ کھاؤ ۔ کیُونکہ زمِین اور اُس کی مَعمُوری خُداوَند کی ہَے۔ 29 ۲۹۔دِینی اِمتیاز سے میرا مطلب تیرا اِمتیاز نہیں بلکہ اُس دُوسرے کا۔ بھَلا میری آزادی دُوسرے شخْص کے اِمتِیاز سے کیُوں پرکھی جائے؟ 30 ۳۰۔پَس اگر مَیں شُکر کر کے کھاتا ہُوں تو جِس کھانے پر شُکر کرتا ہُوں اُس کے سبب سے بدنام کیُوں کِیا جاتا ہُوں؟ 31 ۳۱۔پَس تُم کھاؤ یا پِیو یا جو کُچھ کرو سب خُدا کے جَلال کے لیے کرو۔ 32 ۳۲۔تُم نہ تو یہوُدِیوں کے لیے ٹھوکر کا باعِث بنو نہ یوُنانِیوں کے لیے نہ ہی خُدا کی کلِیسِیا کے لیے۔ 33 ۳۳۔چُنانچہ مَیں بھی سب باتوں میں سب کو خُوش کرتا ہُوں اور اپنا نہیں بلکہ بہتیروں کا فائِدہ ڈُھونڈتا ہُوں تا کہ وہ نجات پائیں۔
1 ۱۔تُم میری تَقْلِید کرو جِس طرح کہ مَیں مسِیح کی تَقْلِید کرتا ہُوں۔ 2 ۲۔مَیں تُمھاری تَعرِیف کرتا ہُوں کہ تُم ہر بات میں مُجھے یاد رکھتے ہو اور جِس طرح مَیں نے تُمھیں رِوایَتیں پُہنچا دِیں تُم اُسی طرح اُن کو برقرار رکھتے ہو۔ 3 ۳۔پَس مَیں تُمھیں آگاہ کرنا چاہتا ہُوں کہ ہر مَرْد کا سر مسِیح اور عَورت کا سر مَرْد اورمسِیح کا سر خُدا ہَے۔ 4 ۴۔جو مَرْد سر ڈَھانپ کر دُعا یا نُبُوَّت کرتا ہَے وہ اپنے سر کو بے حُرمت کرتا ہَے ۔ 5 ۵۔ اور جو عَورت بغیر سر ڈھانپے دُعا یا نُبُوَّت کرتی ہَے وہ اپنے سر کو بے حُرمت کرتی ہَےکیُونکہ وہ سر مُنڈی کے برابر ہَے۔ 6 ۶۔اگر عَورت اَوڑھنی نہ اَوڑھے تو بال بھی کٹائے۔ اگر عَورت کا بال کٹانا یا سر مُنڈانا شرم کی بات ہَے تو اَوڑھنی اَوڑھے۔ 7 ۷۔البَتّہ مَرْد کو اپنا سر ڈھانپنا نہ چاہیے کیُونکہ وہ خُدا کی صُورت اور اُس کا جلال ہَے مگر عَورت مَرْد کا جلال ہَے ۔ 8 ۸۔ اِس لیے کہ مَرْد عَورت سے نہیں بلکہ عَورت مَرْد سے ہَے۔ 9 ۹۔ اور مَرْد عَورت کے لیے نہیں بلکہ عَورت مَرْد کے لیے پیدا کی گَئی تھی۔ 10 ۱۰۔ پَس فِرشتوں کے سبب سے عَورت کو چاہیے کہ اپنے سر پر مُطِیع ہونے کی علامت رکھّے۔ 11 ۱۱۔تو بھی خُداوَند میں نہ عَورت مَرْد کے بغَیر ہَے نہ مَرْد عَورت کے بغیر۔ 12 ۱۲۔کیُونکہ جَیسے عَورت مَرْد سے ہَے وَیسے ہی مَرْد بھی عَورت کے وسِیلے سے ہَے، بلکہ سب چِیزیں خُدا کی طرف سے ہَیں ۔ 13 ۱۳۔تُم آپ ہی اِنصاف کرو۔ کیا مُناسِب ہَے کہ عَورت بغیر سر ڈھانپے دُعا کرے۔ 14 ۱۴۔کیا تُم کو فِطری طور پر بھی معلُوم نہیں کہ اگر مَرْد لمبے بال رکھّے تو اُس کی بے حُرمتی ہَے ؟ 15 ۱۵۔اور اگر عَورت کے لمبے بال ہوں تو اُس کی زِینت ہَے کیُونکہ بال اُسے پردے کے لیے دئِیے گَئے ہَیں۔ 16 ۱۶۔لیکِن اگر کوئی اِس مُعاملہ پر حُجّتی نِکلے تو جان رکھّے کہ نہ ہمارا ایسا دَستُور ہَے نہ خُداوَند کی کلِیسِیاؤں کا۔ 17 ۱۷۔لیکِن اَب جو حُکْم دیتا ہُوں اُس میں تُمھاری تَعرِیف نہیں کرتا کیُونکہ تُمھارے جمع ہونے سے فائِدہ نہیں بلکہ نُقصان ہوتا ہَے۔ 18 ۱۸۔کیُونکہ اوّل تو مَیں سُنتا ہُوں کہ جب تُمھاری کلِیسِیا جمع ہوتی ہَے تو تُم میں تَفرِقے ہوتے ہَیں اور مُجھے اِس بات کا جُزوی طور پر یقِین بھی ہَے۔ 19 ۱۹۔کیُونکہ تُم میں بِدعَتوں کا بھی ہونا ضرُور ہَے تا کہ ظاہِر ہو جائے کہ تُم میں مَقبُول کون سے ہَیں۔ 20 ۲۰۔پَس جَب تُم باہم جمع ہوتے ہو تو تُمھارا وہ کھانا عشایِ ربّانی نہیں ہو سکتا۔ 21 ۲۱۔کیُونکہ کھانے کے وقت ہر شخْص اپنا ہی عَشا کھا لیتا ہَے، اور کوئی تو بھُوکا رہ جاتا ہَے اور کِسی کو نَشہ ہو جاتا ہَے۔ 22 ۲۲۔کیُوں؟ کیا کھانے پِینے کے لیے تُمھارے گھر نہیں ؟یا خُدا کی کلِیسِیا کی توہیِن کرتے ہو اور جِن کے پاس نہیں اُن کو شرمِندہ کرتے ہو؟مَیں تُم سے کیا کہُوں؟ کیا تُمھاری تَعرِیف کرُوں؟ مَیں اِس بات میں تَعرِیف نہیں کرتا۔ 23 ۲۳۔کیُونکہ یہ بات مُجھےخُداوَند سے پہنچی اور مَیں نے تُم کو بھی پہنچا دی ہَے کہ خُداوَندیِسُوعؔ نے جِس رات وہ پکڑوایا گیا روٹی لی۔ 24 ۲۴۔اور شُکر کر کے توڑی اور کہا ’’یہ میرا بدَن ہَے جو تُمھارے لیے ہَے ۔میری یادگاری کے واسطے یہی کِیا کرو۔‘‘ 25 ۲۵۔اِسی طرح اُس نے کھانے کے بعد پیالہ بھی لِیا اور کہا کہ یہ پیالہ میرے خُون میں نیا عہد ہَے۔ جب کبھی پِیو میری یادگاری کے لیے یہی کِیا کرو۔ 26 ۲۶۔کیُونکہ جَب کبھی تُم یہ روٹی کھاتے اور اِس پیالے میں سے پِیتے ہوتو خُداوَند کی مَوت کا اِظہار کرتے ہو، جب تک وہ نہ آئے ۔ 27 ۲۷۔اِس واسطے جو کوئی نامُناسب طور پر خُداوَند کی روٹی کھائے یا اُس کے پیالے میں سے پِیے وہ خُداوَند کے بدَن اور خُون کے بارے میں قُصُوروار ہو گا۔ 28 ۲۸۔پَس آدمی اپنے آپ کو جانچ لے اور اِسی طرح اُس روٹی میں سے کھائے اور اُس پیالے میں سے پِیئے۔ 29 ۲۹۔کیُونکہ جو کھاتے اور پِیتے وقت خُداوَند کے بدَن کو نہ پہچانے وہ اِس کھانے پِینے سے سزا پائے گا۔ 30 ۳۰۔اِسی سبب سے تُم میں بہتیرے کمزور اور بِیمار ہَیں اور بہت سے سو بھی گَئےہَیں۔ 31 ۳۱۔اگر ہم اپنے آپ کو جانچتے تو سزا نہ پاتے۔ 32 ۳۲۔لیکِن خُداوَند سے سزا پا کر ہمیں نَصِیحَت ہوتی ہَے تا کہ ہم دُنیا کے ساتھ مُجرم نہ ٹھہرائے جائیں۔ 33 ۳۳۔پَس اَے میرے بھائِیو! جب تُم کھانے کے لیے جمع ہو تو ایک دُوسرے کی راہ دیکھو۔ 34 ۳۴۔اور اگر کوئی بھُوکا ہو تو اپنے گھر میں کھا لے تا کہ تُمھارا جمع ہونا سزا کا باعِث نہ ہو، اور باقی باتوں کی ترتیب مَیں آ کر دُرست کر دُوں گا۔
1 ۱۔اَےبھائِیو!مَیں نہیں چاہتا کہ رُوحانی نِعمَتوں کے بارے میں تُم بے خبر رہو۔ 2 ۲۔ تُم جانتے ہو کہ جب تُم غَیر قوم تھے تو گُونگے بُتوں کے پیِچھے جِس طرح کوئی تُم کو لے جاتا تھا اُسی طرح جاتے تھے ۔ 3 ۳۔پَس مَیں تُمھیں جِتاتا ہُوں کہ جو کوئی خُدا کے رُوح کی ہِدایت سے بولتا ہَے وہ نہیں کہتا کہ یِسُوعؔ مَلعُون ہَے۔اور نہ کوئی رُوح القُدُس کے بغیر کہہ سکتا ہَے کہ یِسُوعؔ خُداوَند ہَے۔ 4 ۴۔پَس نِعمَتیں تو طرح طرح کی ہَیں مگر رُوح ایک ہی ہَے۔ 5 ۵۔اور خِدمتیں بھی طرح طرح کی ہَیں مگر خُداوَند ایک ہی ہَے۔ 6 ۶۔اور تاثِیریں بھی طرح طرح کی ہَیں مگر خُدا ایک ہی ہَے جو سب میں ہر طرح کا اَثر پیدا کرتا ہَے۔ 7 ۷۔لیکِن ہر شخْص کو رُوح کا ظُہُور سب کے فائِدے کے لیے دِیا جاتا ہَے۔ 8 ۸۔کیُونکہ ایک کو رُوح کے وسِیلے سے حِکْمَت کا کلام عنایِت ہوتا ہَےاور دُوسرے کو اُسی رُوح کی مَرضی کے مُوافِق عِلْمیّت کا کلام۔ 9 ۹۔کِسی کو اُسی رُوح سے اِیمان اورکِسی کو اُسی ایک رُوح سے شِفا دینے کی نِعمَت۔ 10 ۱۰۔کِسی کو معجزوں کی قُدرت۔ کِسی کو نُبُوَّت۔ کِسی کو رُوحوں کا اِمتیِاز۔ کِسی کو طرح طرح کی زبانیں۔ کِسی کو زبانوں کا تَرجَمَہ کرنا۔ 11 ۱۱۔لیکِن یہ سب تاثِیریں اُسی ایک رُوح کی ہَیں اور وہ جِسے جو چاہتا ہَے بانٹتا ہَے۔ 12 ۱۲۔کیُونکہ جِس طرح بدَن ایک ہَے اور اس کے اَعضا بہت سے ہَیں اور بدَن کے اَعضا اگرچہ بہت سے ہَیں مگر باہم مِل کر ہی ایک بدَن ہَیں۔ اُسی طرح مسِیح بھی ہَے۔ 13 ۱۳۔کیُونکہ ہم سب نے خواہ یہوُدی ہوں خواہ یُونانی ۔ خواہ غُلام ہوں خواہ آزاد۔ سب نے ایک ہی رُوح کے وسِیلے سے ایک بدَن ہونے کے لیے بَپتِسمہ لِیا اور ہم سب کو ایک ہی رُوح پِلایا گیا۔ 14 ۱۴۔پَس بدَن میں ایک عُضو نہیں بلکہ بہت سے ہَیں۔ 15 ۱۵۔اگر پاؤں کہَے چونکہ مَیں ہاتھ نہیں اِس لیے بدَن کا نہیں تو وہ اِس سبب سے بدَن سے خارج تو نہیں ۔ 16 ۱۶۔اور اگر کان کہَے چونکہ مَیں آنکھ نہیں اِس لیے بدَن کا نہیں تو وہ اِس سبب سے بدَن سے خارج تو نہیں ۔ 17 ۱۷۔اگر سارا بدَن آنکھ ہی ہوتا تو سُننا کہاں ہوتا؟ اگر سُننا ہی سُننا ہو تو سُونگھنا کہاں ہوتا؟ 18 ۱۸۔مگر فی الحقِیقَت خُدا نے ہر ایک عُضو کو بدَن میں اپنی مَرضی کے مُوافِق رکھّا ہَے۔ 19 ۱۹۔اگر وہ سب ایک ہی عُضو ہوتے تو بدَن کہاں ہوتا؟ 20 ۲۰۔مگر اَب اَعضا تو خواہ بہت سے ہَیں لیکِن بدَن ایک ہی ہَے۔ 21 ۲۱۔لِہٰذا آنکھ ہاتھ سے نہیں کہہ سکتی کہ مَیں تیری مُحتاج نہیں اور نہ سر پاؤں سے کہہ سکتا ہَے کہ مَیں تیرا مُحتاج نہیں ۔ 22 ۲۲۔بلکہ بدَن کے وہ اَعضا جو نِسبتاً کمزور معلُوم ہوتے ہَیں وہ بہت ہی ضرُوری ہَیں۔ 23 ۲۳۔اور بدَن کے وہ اَعضاجِنھیں ہم اَوروں کی نِسبت حقیِر جانتے ہَیں اُن ہی کو زیادہ عِزّت دیتے ہَیں اور ہمارے نازیبا اَعضا بہت زیبا ہو جاتے ہَیں۔ 24 ۲۴۔حالانکہ ہمارے زیبا اَعضا مُحتاج نہیں مگر خُدا نے بدَن کو اس طرح مُرکّب کیا ہَے کہ جو عُضو محتاج ہَے اُسی کو زیادہ عِزَّت دی جائے۔ 25 ۲۵۔تا کہ بدَن میں تَفرِقہ نہ پڑے بلکہ اَعضا ایک دُوسرے کی یکساں فِکْر رکھیں۔ 26 ۲۶۔پَس اگر ایک عُضْو دُکھ پاتا ہَے تو سب اَعضا اُس کے ساتھ دُکھ پاتے ہَیں اور اگر ایک عُضو عِزّت پاتا ہَے تو سب اَعضا اُس کے ساتھ خُوش ہوتے ہَیں۔ 27 ۲۷۔پَس اَب تُم مسِیح کا بدَن اور فرداً فرداً اَعضا ہو۔ 28 ۲۸۔اورخُدا نے کلِیسِیا میں بعض کو اِنفرادی طور پر مُقرر کِیا ہَے۔ پہلے رَسُول دُوسرے نبی تیِسرے اُستاد۔ پِھر معجزات دِکھانے والے، پِھر شِفا دینے والے، مدد گار، مُنتَظِم ،طر ح طرح کی زبانیں بولنے والے۔ 29 ۲۹۔کیا سب رَسُول ہَیں؟ کیا سب نبی ہَیں؟ کیا سب اُستاد ہَیں؟ کیا سب مُعجِزَہ دِکھانے والے ہَیں؟ 30 ۳۰۔کیا سب کو شِفا دینے کی قُوت عنایت ہُوئی؟کیا سب طرح طرح کی زبانیں بولتے ہَیں؟ کیا سب تَرجَمَہ کرتے ہَیں؟ 31 ۳۱۔پَس تُم اِس سے بھی بڑی نِعمَتوں کی آرزُو رَکھو۔لیکِن مَیں تُمھیں ایک اَور طریقہ بتاتا ہُوں جو اِن سب سے بھی بڑھ کر ہَے ۔
1 ۱۔اگر مَیں آدمِیوں اورفِرشتوں کی زبانیں بولُوں تاہم مُحَبَّت نہ رکھُوں تو مَیں ٹھَنٹَھناتا پِیتل اور جھنجھناتی جَھانجھ ہُوں۔ 2 ۲۔اور اگر مُجھے نُبُوَّت مِلی ہو اور سب بھیدوں اور کُل عِلْم کی واقفِیت رکھتا ہُوں اور میرا اِیمان یہاں تک کامِل ہو کہ پہاڑوں کو ہٹا دُوں مگر مُحَبَّت نہ رکھُّوں تو مَیں کُچھ بھی نہیں ۔ 3 ۳۔اور اگر اپنا سارا مال غرِیبوں کو کِھلا دُوں یا اپنا بدَن جلانے کو دے دُوں لیکِن مُحَبَّت نہ رکھُّوں تو مُجھےکُچھ بھی فائِدہ نہیں ۔ 4 ۴۔مُحَبَّت صابَر ہَے اور مِہربان۔ مُحَبَّت حَسد نہیں کرتی۔ مُحَبَّت شیخی نہیں مارتی اورپُھولتی نہیں۔ 5 ۵۔نازیبا کام نہیں کرتی۔ اپنی بہتری نہیں چاہتی۔جُھنجھلاتی نہیں ۔ بدگُمانی نہیں کرتی۔ 6 ۶۔بدکاری سے خُوش نہیں ہوتی بلکہ راستی سے خُوش ہوتی ہَے۔ 7 ۷۔ سب کُچھ سہہ لیتی ہَے۔ سب کُچھ یقِین کرتی ہَے۔ سب باتوں کی اُمّید رکھتی ہَے۔ سب باتوں کی برداشت کرتی ہَے۔ 8 ۸۔مُحَبَّت کو زوال نہیں ۔ نُبُوَّتیں ہوں تو مَوقُوف ہوجائیں گی۔ زبانیں ہوں تو جاتی رہَیں گی۔ عِلْم ہو تو مِٹ جائے گا۔ 9 ۹۔کیُونکہ ہمارا عِلْم جُزوی ہے اور ہماری نُبُوَّت ناتَمام۔ 10 ۱۰۔لیکِن جب کامِل آئےگا تو جُزوی جاتا رہَے گا۔ 11 ۱۱۔جب مَیں بچّہ تھا تو بچّوں کی طرح بولتا تھا۔ بچّوں کی سی طبیِعَت تھی۔بچّوں کی سی سَمجھ تھی۔لیکِن جب جوان ہُوا تو بچّوں کی سی باتیں ترک کر دیں۔ 12 ۱۲۔اَب ہم کو آئینہ میں مُبہَم سا دِکھائی دیتا ہَے مگر اُس وقت رُو بہ رُو دیکھیں گے۔اِس وقت میرا عِلْم جُزوی ہَے مگر اُس وقت اَیسے پوُرے طور پر جانُوں گا جَیسے مَیں بھی جانا گیا ہُوں۔ 13 ۱۳۔غَرَض اِیمان، اُمّیِد اور مُحَبَّت، یہ تِینوں دائمی ہَیں مگر اِن میں اَفضْل ترین مُحَبَّت ہی ہَے۔
1 ۱۔اَب مُحَبَّت کے طالِب ہو اوررُوحانی نِعمَتوں کی آرزُو بھی رکھّو۔ خصُوصاً یہ کہ تُم نُبُوَّت کر سکو۔ 2 ۲۔کیُونکہ جو بیگانہ زبان میں باتیں کرتا ہَے وہ آدمِیوں سے نہیں بلکہ خُدا سے باتیں کرتا ہَے اِسی لیے اُس کی کوئی نہیں سمجھتا حالانکہ وہ اپنی رُوح کے وسِیلے سے بھید کی باتیں کہتا ہَے۔ 3 ۳۔لیکِن جو نُبُوَّت کرتا ہَے وہ آدمِیوں سے ترقّی اورنَصِیحَت اور تسلّی کی باتیں کہتا ہَے۔ 4 ۴۔بیگانہ زُبان میں بات کرنے والا اپنی ترقّی کرتا ہَےاور نُبُوَّت کرنے والا کلِیسِیا کی ترقّی کرتا ہَے۔ 5 ۵۔ اَگرچہ مَیں یہ چاہتا ہُوں کہ تُم سب بیگانہ زُبانوں میں باتیں کرو لیکِن زیادہ تر یہی چاہتاہُوں کہ نُبُوَّت کرو، کیُونکہ بیگانہ زُبانیں بولنے والا اگر کلِیسِیا کی ترقّی کے لیے ترجمہ نہ کرے تو نُبُوَّت کرنے والا اُس سے بڑا ہَے۔ 6 ۶۔اَب اَےبھائِیو! اگر مَیں تُمھارے پاس آ کر بیگانہ زُبان میں بات کرُوں اور مُکاشفہ یا عِلْم یا نُبُوَّت یا تَعلِیم کی باتیں تُم سے نہ کہُوں تو تُم کو مُجھ سے کیا فائِدہ ہو گا؟ 7 ۷۔حتیٰ کہ وہ آوازیں جو بے جان چِیزوں مثلاً بانسُری یا بَربط سے نِکلتی ہَیں، اگر اُن آوازوں میں فرق نہ ہو تو جو پھُونکا یا بَجایا جاتا ہَے وہ کِس طرح پہچانا جائے؟ 8 ۸۔ اور اگر تُر ہی کی آواز صاف نہ ہو تو کون لڑائی کے لیے تَیّاری کرے گا؟ 9 ۹۔پَس اگر تُم بھی زُبان سے واضح بات نہ کہو تو کہی گَئی بات کو کِس طرح سمجھا جائے گا؟ تُم محْض ہَوا سے باتیں کرنے والے ٹھہرو گے۔ 10 ۱۰۔قطع ِ نظر کہ دُنیا میں کِتنی ہی مُختلف زُبانیں ہَیں، مگر اُن میں سے کوئی بھی بے معنی نہیں ۔ 11 ۱۱۔لِہٰذا اگر مَیں کِسی زُبان کے معنی نہ سمجُھوں تو بولنے والے کے نزدِیک اَجنبی ٹھہرُؤں گا اور بولنے والا میرے نزدِیک اَجنبی ٹھہرے گا۔ 12 ۱۲۔پَس جب تُم رُوحانی نِعمَتوں کی آرزُو رکھتے ہو تو اَیسی کوشِش کرو کہ تُمھاری نِعمَتوں کی کثرت سے کلِیسِیا کی ترقّی ہو۔ 13 ۱۳۔پَس جو بیگانہ زُبان میں باتیں کرتا ہَے وہ دُعا کرے کہ تَرجمہ بھی کر سکے۔ 14 ۱۴۔اِس لیے کہ اگر مَیں کِسی بیگانہ زُبان میں دُعا کروُں، تب میری رُوح تو دُعا کرتی ہَے مگر میری عَقْل بے کار ہَے۔ 15 ۱۵۔پَس کیا کرنا چاہیے؟ مَیں رُوح سے بھی دُعا کروُں گا اورعَقْل سے بھی دُعا کروُں گا۔رُوح سے بھی گاؤُں گا اورعَقْل سے بھی گاؤُں گا۔ 16 ۱۶۔ورنہ اگر تُو رُوح ہی سے حَمد کرے گا تو ناواقِف آدمی تیری شُکر گُذاری پر آمِین کیُوں کر کہَے گا؟ کیُونکہ وہ نہیں جانتا کہ تُو کیا کہتا ہَے۔ 17 ۱۷۔تُو تو بِلا شُبہ اَچھی طرح سے شُکر کرتا ہَے مگر دُوسرے کی ترقّی نہیں ہوتی۔ 18 ۱۸۔مَیں خُدا کا شُکر کرتا ہُوں کہ تُم سب سے زیادہ زبانیں بولتا ہُوں۔ 19 ۱۹۔لیکِن کلِیسِیا میں بیگانہ زُبان میں دس ہزار باتیں کہنے سے زیادہ مُجھے یہ پَسند ہَے کہ اَوروں کی تَعلِیم کے لیے پانچ ہی باتیں عَقْل سے کہُوں۔ 20 ۲۰۔اَےبھائِیو! تُم سمجھ میں بچّے نہ بنو۔بَدی میں تو بچّے رہو مگر سمجھ میں بالِغ بنو۔ 21 ۲۱۔تورَیت میں لِکھا ہَے کہ خُداوَند فرماتاہَے ’مَیں بیگانہ زُبان اور بیگانہ ہونٹوں سے اِس اُمّت سے باتیں کرُوں گا۔ تو بھی وہ میری نہ سُنیں گے۔‘ 22 ۲۲۔لِہٰذا بیگانہ زُبانیں اِیمان داروں کے لیے نہیں بلکہ بے اِیمانوں کے لیے نِشان ہَیں اور نُبُوَّت بے اِیمانوں کے لیے نہیں بلکہ اِیمان داروں کے لیے نِشان ہَے۔ 23 ۲۳۔پَس اگر ساری کلِیسِیا ایک جگہ جمع ہو اور سب کے سب بیگانہ زُبانیں بولیں اور ناواقِف یا بے اِیمان لوگ اَندر آ جائیں تو کیا وہ تُم کو دِیوانہ نہ کہیں گے؟ 24 ۲۴۔لیکِن اگر سب نُبُوَّت کریں اور کوئی بے اِیمان یا ناواقِف اَندر آ جائے تو سب اُسے قائل کر دیں گے اور سب اُسے پَرَکھ لیں گے۔ 25 ۲۵۔اور اُس کے دِل کے بھید ظاہِر ہوجائیں گے۔ تب وہ مُنہ کے بَل گِر کر سَجدہ کرے گا اور اِقرار کرے گا کہ بے شک خُدا تُمھارے درمیان ہَے۔ 26 ۲۶۔پَس اَے بھائِیو! کیا کرنا چاہیے؟جب تُم سب جمع ہوتے ہو تو ہر ایک کے دِل میں مَزمُور یا تَعلِیم یا مُکاشَفَہ یا بیگانہ زُبان یا تَرجَمہ ہوتا ہَے ۔ یہ سب کچھ رُوحانی ترقی کے لیے ہونا چاہیے۔ 27 ۲۷۔اگر بیگانہ زُبان میں باتیں کرنا ہو تو دو یا زیادَہ سے زیادَہ تین اَشخاص باری باری سے بولیں اور ایک شخْص تَرجمہ کرے۔ 28 ۲۸۔اور اگر کوئی تَرجمہ کرنے والا نہ ہو تو بیگانہ زبان بولنے والا کلِیسِیا میں خاموش رہَےاور اپنے دِل سے اورخُدا سے باتیں کرے۔ 29 ۲۹۔تب نَبِیوں میں سے دو یا تیِن بولیں اور باقی اُن کے کلام کو پرکھیں۔ 30 ۳۰۔لیکِن اگر پاس بیٹھے دُوسرے شخْص پر وَحی اُترے تو پہلا خاموش ہو جائے۔ 31 ۳۱۔کیُونکہ تُم سب کے سب ایک ایک کر کے نُبُوَّت کر سکتے ہو تا کہ سب سیِکھیں اور سب کو نَصِیحَت ہو۔ 32 ۳۲۔اور نَبیوں کی رُوحیں نَبیوں کے تابع ہَیں۔ 33 ۳۳۔کیُونکہ خُدا اَبتری کا نہیں بلکہ اَمْن کا بانی ہَے۔ جَیسا مُقَدّسوں کی سب کلِیسِیاؤں میں ہَے۔ 34 ۳۴۔ عَورتیں کلِیسِیا کے مجمع میں خاموش رہَیں کیُونکہ اُنہیں بولنے کا حُکْم نہیں بلکہ تابع رہَیں جَیسا تَورَیت میں بھی لِکھا ہَے۔ 35 ۳۵۔ اور اگر کُچھ سیِکھنا چاہَیں تو گھر میں اپنے اپنے شوہروں سے پُوچھیں کیُونکہ عَورت کا کلِیسِیا کے مجمع میں بولنا شرم کی بات ہَے۔ 36 ۳۶۔ کیا خُدا کا کلام تُم میں سے نِکلا؟ یا صِرف تُم ہی تک پُہنچا ہَے؟ 37 ۳۷۔ اگر کوئی خُود کو نَبی یا رُوحانی سَمجھے تو یہ جان رکھّے کہ جو باتیں مَیں تُمھیں لکِھتا ہُوں وہ خُداوَند کے حُکْم ہَیں۔ 38 ۳۸۔ اور اگر کوئی نہ جانے تو نہ جانے ۔ 39 ۳۹۔پَس اَےبھائِیو! نُبُوَّت کرنے کی آرزُو رکھّو اور زُبانیں بولنے سے منع نہ کرو۔ 40 ۴۰۔مگر سب باتیں شایستگی اور قرینے کے ساتھ عَمَل میں لائی جائیں۔
1 ۱۔اَب اَےبھائِیو! مَیں تُمھیں وہی خُوش خبری جتائے دیتا ہُوں جو پہلے دے چُکا ہُوں، جِسے تُم نے قبُول بھی کر لِیا تھا اور جِس پر قائِم بھی ہو۔ 2 ۲۔اُس کے وسِیلے سے تُم کو نجات بھی مِلتی ہَے بَشَرطیکہ وہ خُوش خبری جو مَیں نے تُمھیں دی تھی یاد رکھتے ہو ورنہ تُمھارا اِیمان لانا بے فائِدہ ہُوا۔ 3 ۳۔چُنانچہ مَیں نے سب سے پہلے تُم کو وہی بات پہنچا دی جو مُجھے پہنچی تھی کہ مسِیح کِتابِ مُقَدّس کے مُطابِق ہمارے گُناہوں کے لیے مُؤا۔ 4 ۴۔ اور دفن ہُوا اور تِیسرے دِن کِتابِ مُقَدّس کے مُطابِق جی اُٹھا۔ 5 ۵۔ اور کَیفاؔ کو اور اُس کے بعد اُن بارہ کو دِکھائی دِیا۔ 6 ۶۔ پِھر پانچ سَو سے زِیادہ بھائِیوں کو ایک ساتھ دِکھائی دِیا۔ جِن میں سے اکثر اَب تک مَوجُود ہَیں اور بعض سو گَئے۔ 7 ۷۔ پِھر یَعقُوبؔ کو دِکھائی دِیا، پِھر سب رَسُولوں کو۔ 8 ۸۔ اَور سب سے آخر میں مُجھ پر بھی ظاہِر ہُوا جو گویا اَدُھورے دِنوں کی پَیدایش ہُوں۔ 9 ۹۔ کیُونکہ مَیں رَسُولوں میں سب سے چھوٹا ہُوں بلکہ رَسُول کہلانے کے لائِق نہیں ۔ اِس لیے کہ مَیں نے خُدا کی کلِیسِیا کو ستایا۔ 10 ۱۰۔لیکِن جو کُچھ ہُوں خُدا کے فضْل سے ہُوں اور اُس کا فضْل جو مُجھ پر ہُوا وہ بے فائِدہ نہیں ہُوا بلکہ مَیں نے اُن سب سے زیادَہ محنَت کی جو میری طرف سے نہیں ہُوئی بلکہ خُدا کے اُس فضْل سے جو مُجھ پر ہُوا۔ 11 ۱۱۔پَس خواہ مَیں ہُوں یا وہ، ہم یہی مُنادی کرتے ہَیں اورتُم اِسی پر اِیمان بھی لائے۔ 12 ۱۲۔پَس جب مسِیح کی بابَت یہ مُنادی کی جاتی ہَے کہ وہ مُردوں میں سے جی اُٹھا تو تُم میں سے بعض کَیسے کہہ سکتے ہَیں کہ مُردوں کی قَیامت ہَے ہی نہیں ؟ 13 ۱۳۔ اگر مُردوں کی قَیامت نہیں تو مسِیح بھی نہیں جی اُٹھا۔ 14 ۱۴۔اَور اگر مسِیح ہی نہیں جی اُٹھا تو ہماری مُنادی بھی بے فائِدہ ہَے اور تُمھارا اِیمان بھی بے فائِدہ ۔ 15 ۱۵۔بلکہ ہم بھی خُدا کے جُھوٹے گواہ ٹھہرے کیُونکہ ہم نے تو خُدا کی بابَت یہ گواہی دی کہ اُس نے مسِیح کو جِلایا، اگر بالفرض مُردے نہیں جی اُٹھتے ، تو مسِیح کو بھی نہیں جِلایا۔ 16 ۱۶۔اور اگر مُردے نہیں جی اُٹھتے تو مسِیح بھی نہیں جی اُٹھا۔ 17 ۱۷۔اور اگر مسِیح نہیں جی اُٹھا تو تُمھارا اِیمان بے فائِدہ ہَے تُم اَب تک اپنے گُناہوں میں گرِفتار ہو۔ 18 ۱۸۔بلکہ جو مسِیح میں سو گَئےہَیں وہ بھی ہلاک ہُوئے۔ 19 ۱۹۔اگر ہم صِرف اِسی زِندگی تک مسِیح میں اُمّید رکھتے ہَیں تو سب آدمِیوں سے زیادہ بَد نَصِیب ہَیں۔ 20 ۲۰۔لیکِن مسِیح حقیِقتاً مُردوں میں سے جی اُٹھا اور جو سو گَئےہَیں اُن میں پہلا پَھل ہُوا۔ 21 ۲۱۔کیُونکہ جِس طرح آدمی کے سبب سے مَوت آئی تو آدمی ہی کے سبب سے مُردوں کی قَیامت بھی آئی۔ 22 ۲۲۔لِہٰذا جِیسے آدم میں سب مَرتے ہَیں وَیسے ہی مسِیح میں سب زِندہ کیے جائیں گے۔ 23 ۲۳۔لیکِن سب اپنی اپنی باری سے ۔پہلا پَھل مسِیح۔ پِھر مسِیح کے آنے پر اُس کے لوگ۔ 24 ۲۴۔اِس کے بعد آخرت ہو گی۔ اُس وقت وہ ساری حُکوُمت اور سارا اِختِیاراور قُدرت نیست کر کے بادشاہی کو خُدا یعنی باپ کے حوالہ کر دے گا۔ 25 ۲۵۔کیُونکہ جب تک وہ سب دُشمنوں کو اپنے پاؤں تلے نہ لے آئے اُس کو بادشاہی کرنا ضرُور ہَے ۔ 26 ۲۶۔اور سب سے آخری دُشمن جو نیست کِیا جائے گا وہ مَوت ہَے۔ 27 ۲۷۔اگرچہ خُدا نے سب کچھ اُس کے پاؤں تلے کر دِیا ہَے، مگر جب وہ فرماتا ہَےکہ سب کُچھ اُس کے تابع کر دِیا گیا تو ظاہِرہَے کہ جِس نے سب کُچھ اُس کے تابع کر دِیا وہ خُود الگ ہَے۔ 28 ۲۸۔اور جب سب کُچھ اُس کے تابع ہو جائے گا تو بیٹا خُود اُس کے تابع ہو جائے گا جِس نے سب چِیزیں اُس کے تابع کر دی ہَیں تا کہ سب میں خُدا ہی سب کُچھ ہو۔ 29 ۲۹۔اور پِھر وہ لوگ کیا کریں گے جو مُردوں کے لیے بَپتِسمہ لیتے ہَیں؟ اگر مُردے جی اُٹھتے ہی نہیں تو پِھر اُن کے لیے بَپتِسمہ کیُوں لیتے ہَیں؟ 30 ۳۰۔اور ہم کیُوں ہر وقت خطرے میں پڑے رہتے ہَیں؟ 31 ۳۱۔اَےبھائِیو! مُجھے اُس فَخْر کی قَسم جو ہمارے خُداوَند مسِیح میں تُم پر ہَے،مَیں ہر روز مَرتا ہُوں۔ 32 ۳۲۔اگر مَیں اِنسانی طریق سے اِفِسُسؔ میں درِندوں سے لڑا تو مُجھے کیا فائِدہ؟ اگر مُردے جِلائے نہ جائیں گے تو آؤ کھائیں پِئیں کیُونکہ کل کو مر ہی جانا ہَے۔ 33 ۳۳۔فریب نہ کھاؤ۔ بُری صُحبتیں اچھّی عادتوں کو بِگاڑ دیتی ہَیں۔ 34 ۳۴۔راست طور سے ہوش میں آؤ اور گُناہ نہ کرو کیُونکہ بَعض خُدا سے ناواقِف ہَیں۔ مَیں تُمھیں شرم دِلانے کو یہ کہتا ہُوں۔ 35 ۳۵۔اَب کیا کوئی یہ کہَے گا کہ مُردے کِس طرح جی اُٹھتے اور کِس طرح کا جِسْم بن جاتے ہَیں؟ 36 ۳۶۔اَے نادان! تُو خُود جو کُچھ بوتا ہَے جب تک وہ نہ مَرے زِندہ نہیں کِیا جاتا۔ 37 ۳۷۔اور جو تُو بوتا ہَےیہ وہ جِسْم نہیں جو پَیدا ہونے والا ہَے بلکہ صِرف دانہ ہَے۔خواہ گیہُوں کا خواہ کِسی اَور چِیز کا۔ 38 ۳۸۔مگر خُدا اُسے اپنے اِرادے کے مُوافِق وجود اور ہر ایک بیِج کو مُنفَرِد جِسْم بخشتا ہَے۔ 39 ۳۹۔سب گوشت یکساں گوشت نہیں بلکہ آدمِیوں کا گوشت اَورہَے ۔چوپایوں کا گوشت اَور۔ پرِندوں کا گوشت اَور ہَے، مَچھلِیوں کا گوشت اَور۔ 40 ۴۰۔جِسْم آسمانی بھی ہَیں اور زمِینی بھی مگر آسمانِیوں کا جلال مُنفَرِد ہَے زمِینِیوں کا مُنفَرِد۔ 41 ۴۱۔آفتاب کا جلال مُنفَرِد ہَے مہتاب کا جلال مُنفَرِد ۔سِتاروں کا جلال مُنفَرِد ہَےکیُونکہ سِتارے سِتارے کے جلال میں فرق ہَے۔ 42 ۴۲۔مُردوں کی قَیامت بھی اَیسی ہی ہَے۔جِسْم فَنا کی حالت میں بویا جاتا ہَےاور بَقا کی حالت میں جی اُٹھتا ہَے۔ 43 ۴۳۔ذِلّت کی حالت میں بویا جاتا ہَےاور جلال کی حالت میں جی اُٹھتاہَے۔کمزوری کی حالت میں بویا جاتا ہَےاور قَوی حالت میں جی اُٹھتا ہَے۔ 44 ۴۴۔ نَفسانی جِسْم بویا جاتا ہَے اور رُوحانی جِسْم جی اُٹھتا ہَے۔اگر نَفسانی جِسْم ہَے تو رُوحانی جِسْم بھی ہَے۔ 45 ۴۵۔چُنانچہ یہ بھی لِکھا ہَے کہ پہلا آدمی یعنی آدمؔ جِیتی جان ہُوا۔ پِچھلا آدمؔ زِندگی بخشنے والی رُوح ہُوا۔ 46 ۴۶۔لیکِن پہلا رُوحانی نہ تھا بلکہ نَفسانی تھا۔اِس کے بعد رُوحانی ہُوا۔ 47 ۴۷۔پہلا آدمی زمِین کی مِٹّی سے تھا۔ دُوسرا آدمی آسمانی ہَے۔ 48 ۴۸۔جَیسا وہ خاکی تھا وَیسے ہی اَور خاکی بھی ہَیں، اور جَیسا وہ آسمانی ہَے وَیسے ہی اَور آسمانی بھی ہَیں۔ 49 ۴۹۔اورجِس طرح ہم اِس خاکی کی صُورت پر ہَیں اُسی طرح اُس آسمانی کی صُورت پر بھی ہوں گے۔ 50 ۵۰۔اَے بھائِیو! میرا مطلب یہ ہَے کہ گوشت اور خُون خُدا کی بادشاہی کے وارِث ہونے کے لائِق نہیں اور نہ فَنا بَقا کی وارث ہو سکتی ہَے۔ 51 ۵۱۔دیکھو مَیں تُم سے بھید کی بات کہتا ہُوں۔ہم سب تو نہیں سوئیں گے مگر سب بدل جائیں گے۔ 52 ۵۲۔اور یہ آخری نرسِنگا پُھونکتے ہی ایک دَم میں، پَلک جھپکتے ہی ہو گا کیُونکہ نرسِنگا پُھونکا جائے گا اور مُردے غیر فانی حالت میں جی اُٹھیں گے اور ہم بدل جائیں گے۔ 53 ۵۳۔کیُونکہ ضرُور ہَے کہ یہ فانی جِسْم بَقا کا جامہ پہنےاور یہ مَرنے والا جِسْم حیاتِ اَبدی کا جامہ پہنے۔ 54 ۵۴۔اور جب یہ فانی جِسْم بَقا کا جامہ پہن چُکے گا اور یہ مَرنے والا جِسْم حیاتِ اَبدی کا جامہ پہنچ چُکے گا تو وہ قَول پُورا ہو گا جو لِکھا ہَے کہ مَوت فتح کا لُقمَہ ہو گَئی۔ 55 ۵۵۔’’اَے مَوت تیری فَتْح کہاں رہی؟ اَے مَوت تیرا ڈنک کہاں رہا؟‘‘ 56 ۵۶۔ اور مَوت کا ڈنک گُناہ ہَے اور گُناہ کا زور شرِیعت ہَے۔ 57 ۵۷۔ مگر خُدا کا شُکْر ہَے جو ہمارے خُداوَند یِسُوؔع مسِیح کے وسِیلے سے ہمیں فَتْح بَخشتا ہَے۔ 58 ۵۸۔پَس اَے میرے عَزِیز بھائِیو!تُم ثابت قدم اور قائِم رہ کر خُداوَند کے کام میں ہمیشہ اَفزایِش کرتے رہو کیُونکہ یہ جانتے ہو کہ تُمھاری محنَت خُداوَند میں بے فائِدہ نہیں ہَے۔
1 ۱۔اَب اُس چندے کی بابَت جو مُقدّسوں کے واسطے کِیا جاتا ہَے، جَیسا مَیں نے گَلِتّیہؔ کی کلِیسِیاؤں کو حُکْم دِیا وَیسا ہی تُم بھی کرو۔ 2 ۲۔ہَفتے کے پہلے دِن تُم میں سے ہر شخْص اپنی آمدن کے مُوافِق کُچھ اپنے پاس رکھ چھوڑا کرے تا کہ میرے آنے پر چندے نہ کرنے پڑیں۔ 3 ۳۔اور جب مَیں آؤُں تو جِنھیں تُم مَنظُور کرو گے، مَیں اُن کو خَط دے کر بھیج دُوں گا تا کہ تُمھاری خَیرات یروشلِؔیم کو پُہنچا دیں۔ 4 ۴۔اور اگر میرا بھی جانا مُناسِب ہُوا تو وہ میرے ساتھ ہی جائیں گے۔ 5 ۵۔ اور مَیں مَکِدُنیہؔ سے ہو کر تُمھارے پاس آؤُں گا کیُونکہ مَیں مَکِدُنیِہؔ سے ہی گُزر رہا ہُوں۔ 6 ۶۔مگر قیام شاید تُمھارے ہی پاس کروُں اور موسمِ سرما بھی تُمھارے ہی پاس گُزارُوں تا کہ جِس طرف مَیں جانا چاہُوں تُم مُجھے اُس طرف رَوانہ کر دو۔ 7 ۷۔کیُونکہ مَیں اَب راہ میں گُزرتے گُزرتے تُم سے مُلاقات کرنا نہیں چاہتا۔ بلکہ مُجھے اُمِّید ہَے کہ خُداوَند نے چاہا تو کُچھ عرصہ تُمھارے پاس رہُوں گا۔ 8 ۸۔لیکِن مَیں عِیدِ پِنتکُست تک اِفِسُسؔ میں رہُوں گا۔ 9 ۹۔کیُونکہ میرے لیے ایک وسِیع اور کار آمد دروَازہ کھُلا ہَےاور مُخالِف بہت سے ہَیں۔ 10 ۱۰۔اگر تِیمُتِھیُؔس آ جائے تو خیال رکھنا کہ وہ تُمھارے پاس بے خوف رہَےکیُونکہ وہ میری طرح خُداوَند کا کام کرتا ہَے۔ 11 ۱۱۔پَس کوئی اُسے حَقِیر نہ جانے بلکہ اُسے سلامتی کے ساتھ اِس طرف رَوانہ کرنا کہ میرے پاس آ جائے کیُونکہ مَیں مُنتَظِر ہُوں کہ وہ بھائِیوں سَمیت آئے ۔ 12 ۱۲۔اور بھائی اَپُلّوسؔ سے مَیں نے بہت اِلتِماس کی کہ تُمھارے پاس بھائِیوں کے ساتھ جائے مگر وہ فی الحال جانے پر بِالکُل راضی نہ ہُوا لیکِن جب اُسے موقع مِلا تو جائے گا۔ 13 ۱۳۔جاگتے رہو۔ اِیمان میں قائِم رہو۔ مردانگی کرو۔مَضبُوط ہو۔ 14 ۱۴۔جو کُچھ کرتے ہو مُحَبَّت سے کرو۔ 15 ۱۵۔اَےبھائِیو! تُم ستِفناسؔ کے خاندان کو جانتے ہو کہ وہ اَخِیہؔ کے پہلے پَھل ہَیں اور مُقدّسوں کی خِدمت کے لیے مُسْتَعِد رہتے ہَیں۔ 16 ۱۶۔پَس مَیں تُم سے اِلتِماس کرتا ہُوں کہ اَیسے لوگوں کے تابع رہو بلکہ ہر ایک کے جو اِس کام اور محنَت میں شرِیک ہَے۔ 17 ۱۷۔اور مَیں ستِفناسؔ اور فرتُوناتُسؔ اور اخیکُسؔ کے آنے سے خُوش ہُوں کیُونکہ جو کُچھ تُمھاری طرف سے کم رہا وہ اُنھوں نے فراہم کر دِیا۔ 18 ۱۸۔اور اُنھوں نے میری اورتُمھاری رُوح کو تازہ کِیا۔ پَس ایسوں کو سراہو۔ 19 ۱۹۔آسِیہؔ کی کلِیسِیائیں تُمھیں سلام کہتی ہَیں۔اَکوِلؔہ اور پَرِسکؔہ اُس کلِیسِیا سمیت جو اُن کے گھر میں ہَےتُمھیں خُداوَند میں بہُت بہُت سلام کہتے ہَیں۔ 20 ۲۰۔سب بھائی تُمھیں سلام کہتے ہَیں۔ پاک بوسہ لے کر آپس میں سلام کرو۔ 21 ۲۱۔مَیں پَولُسؔ اپنے ہاتھ سے سلام لِکھتا ہُوں۔ 22 ۲۲۔جو کوئی خُداوَند کو عَزِیز نہیں رکھتا مَلعُون رہَے۔ہمارا خُداوَند آنے والا ہَے۔ 23 ۲۳۔خُداوَند یِسُوعؔ مسِیح کا فضْل تُم پر ہوتا رہَے ۔ 24 ۲۴۔میری مُحَبَّت مسِیح یِسُوعؔ میں تُم سب سے رہَے ۔ آمِین۔
1 ۱۔ پَولُسؔ کی طرف سے جو خُدا کی مرضی سے مسِیح یِسُوعؔ کا رسُول ہَے اور ہمارے بھائی تِیمُتھِیُسؔ کی طرف سے۔ 2 ۲۔خُدا کے مُقَدّسو اور مسِیح میں وفا دار بھائِیو! تُم جو کُلُسّےؔ میں ہو تُم پر فَضْل اورہمارے خُدا باپ کی طرف سے اِطمِینان جاری رہے۔ 3 ۳۔ ہم خُداکے اور ہمارے خُداوَند یِسُوعؔ مسِیح کے باپ کا شُکْر اور ہمیشہ تُمھارے حَق میں دُعاکرتےرہتے ہَیں۔ 4 ۴۔ ہم نےتُمھارےاُس اِیمان کے بارے سُن رکھاہَے جو تُم مسِیح یِسُوعؔ پر رکھتے اور تُمھاری اُس مُحَبَّت کے بارے بھی جوتُم خُدا کے تمام مُقَدّسِین سے رکھتے ہو ۔ 5 ۵۔جِس کا سبَب وہ اُمِّیدہَے جو تُمھارے لیے آسمان میں محَفُوظ ہَے جِس کے بارے تُم کلامِ حَق کی خُوشخَبری کے دَوران سُن چُکے ہو۔ 6 ۶۔جو تُمھارے پاس پُہنچی ۔اِسی طرح یہ خُوشخَبری پھل پھُول رہی اوردُنیا بَھر میں پھیلتی چلی جارہی ہَےبِالکُل اِسی طرح جِس دِن سے تُمھارے درمِیان خُوشخبری سُنائی جانے لَگی اور تُم نے خُدا کے فَضْل کو سَچّائی میں سَمجھا۔ 7 ۷۔یہ وہ خُوشخَبری ہَےجو تُم نے ہمارے ہم خِدمت اِپفَراسؔ سے پائی جو ہماری طرف سے مسِیح یِسُو عؔ کا وَفا دار خادِم ہَے۔ 8 ۸۔اِپفَراسؔ ہی نے ہمیں تُمھاری اُس مُحَبَّت سےآگاہ کِیا جو رُوح میں ہَے۔ 9 ۹۔ اِس مُحَبّت کے سبَب سے جِس دِن سے ہم نے سُن رکھا ہَے، تُمھارے حَق میں یہ دُعا کرنے سے باز نہیں آئےکہ تُم خُدا کی مَرضی کے عِلْم،ہر طرح کی حِکمَت اور رُوحانی سمجھ سے مَعمُور ہو جاؤ۔ 10 ۱۰۔تاکہ تُم ایسا چَلَن اِختِیار کر سکو جوخُدا کا پسَندِیدہ ہو اور ہر نیک کام کا پھل لاتے اور خُدا کے عِلْم میں ترَقّی کرتے ہُوئے ہر جگہ اُس کی خُوشنُودی کا باعِث ہو۔ 11 ۱۱۔ تُم خُدا کے جَلال کی قُدرَت کے مُطابِق ساری قُوَّت سے مُلَبَّس ہوتے چلے جاؤ تاکہ ہر حال میں خُوشی خُوشی صَبْرو تحَمُّل سے کام لے سکو۔ 12 ۱۲۔اور باپ کی شُکْر گُزاری کرتے رہو جِس نے تُمھیں اِس لائِق بنایا تاکہ نُور میں مُقَدّسوں کے ساتھ مِیراث میں شرِیک ہوسکو۔ 13 ۱۳۔ اُس نے ہمیں تارِیکی کی سلطَنَت سے نِکال کر اپنے پیارے بیٹے کی بادشاہی میں داخِل کر لِیاہَے ۔ 14 ۱۴۔جِس میں ہمیں گُناہوں سے چھُٹکارا یَعنی مُعافی حاصِل ہوتی ہَے۔ 15 ۱۵۔وہ اَن دیکھے خُدا کی صُورت پر ہَے اور تمام مَخلُوقات سے پہلے مَولُودہَے۔ 16 ۱۶۔کیُونکہ سب چِیزیں اُسی میں خَلْق ہُویئں خواہ وہ آسمانی ہوں خواہ زمِینی ،خواہ دیکھی خواہ اَن دیکھی۔ تَخت ہوں کہ سلطَنَتیں ، حُکُومتیں ہوں کہ اِختِیاریات،تمام چِیزیں اُس کے ذریعےاور اُس کے لیے خَلْق ہُوئیں۔ 17 ۱۷۔ وہ خُود تمام چِیزوں سے پہلے ہَے اور سب چیزیں اُسی میں قائِم ہَیں۔ 18 ۱۸۔ وہ جِسْم یَعنی کلِیسِیا کا سَر ہَے،وہی آغاز اَوروہی مُردوں میں سے جی اُٹھنےوالوں میں پہلوٹھاہَے۔ 19 ۱۹۔اور اِسی لیے خُدا کو پسَند آیا کہ اُس کی ساری مَعمُوری بیٹے میں سُکُونَت کرے۔ 20 ۲۰۔ اور بیٹےہی کے خُون کے وسِیلے سےجو صلِیب پر بَہا اُس نے زمِین اور آسمان کی تمام چِیزوں کا اپنے ساتھ میل مِلاپ کر لِیا۔ 21 ۲۱۔ اور ایک وقت تھا جَب تُم اپنے بُرے خَیالوں اور کاموں کے سبَب سے گُمراہ اور دِل سے خُدا کے دُشمَن تھے۔ 22 ۲۲۔ لیکِن اَب خُدا نےتُمھارا بھی میل مسِیح کے بدَن میں اُس کی جِسمانی مَوت کے وسِیلے سےکر لِیا تاکہ تُم پاک، بے عَیب اور بے اِلزام بنا کر اُس کے سامنے حاضِر کیے جاؤ۔ 23 ۲۳۔ یہ اِس لیے ہُؤا کہ تُم حَقِیقی طور پر اِیمان میں قائِم اورمظبُوط رہو اور اِنجِیل َکی اُمِّید سے دُور نہ چلے جاؤ جو تُم نے سُنی اَور جِس کی مُنادِی آسمان کے نِیچے تمام مَخلُوقات میں کی گَئی۔ یہ وہی اِنجِیل ہَے جِس کا مَیں پَولُسؔ بھی خادِم ہُوں۔ 24 ۲۴۔ اَب مَیں تُمھارے لیے اپنے دُکھوں پر خُوش ہُوں اور مسِیح کے بدن یَعنی کلِیسِیا کی خاطِر مسِیح کے دُکھوں کی کَمی اپنے جِسْم میں پُوری کر رہا ہُوں۔ 25 ۲۵۔یہ اُس کلِیسِیا کے سبَب سے ہَے جِس کا مَیں خُدا کی بَخشِی ہُوئِی مُختاری کے مُطابِق خادِم ہُوں تاکہ خُدا کے کلام کی تکِمیل ہو۔ 26 ۲۶۔ کلام کا یہ بھید زمانوں اور نسلوں سےتو پَوشِیدہ رکھّا گیا مگر اَب خُدا کے مُقَدَّسِین پر کھولا گیاہَے۔ 27 ۲۷۔ جِن پر خُدا نےیہ بھید کھولنا چاہاکہ وہ جانیں کہ خُدا کے جَلال کی دولَت غَیر اَقوام میں کَیسی ہَے اور وہ بھید یہ ہَے کہ مسِیح جو جَلال کی اُمّید ہَے تُم میں بستا ہَے۔ 28 ۲۸۔ کلام کےاِسی بھید کی مُنادِی کرکے ہم تمام آدمِیوں کو ہدایَت کرتے اور ہم تمام آدمِیوں کوبڑی دانِش مندی سے تَعلِیم دیتے ہَیں تاکہ وہ مسِیح میں کامِل ہو جائیں۔ 29 ۲۹۔ اوراَب اِسی سبَب سے مَیں اُسکی اُس طاقت کے مُطابِق جانفِشانی سے تَگ و دَو کرتا ہُوں جو مُجھ میں زور سے اَثر کرتی ہَے۔
1 ۱۔ مَیں چاہتا ہُوں کہ تُم جان لو کہ مَیں تُمھارے اور لودِیکِؔیہ والوں اور اُن تَمام کے لیے جومیری شکْل سے ناواقِف ہَیں کِس قدْر جانفِشانی کرتا ہُوں۔ 2 ۲۔تاکہ اُنکے دِلوں کو تسَلِی ہواَور وہ مُحَبَّت سےاِکٹّھے رہَیں اور مُکَمَّل سَمجھ کی پُوری دولَت پایئں اور اِلٰہی بھید یَعنی مسِیح کو پہچانیں ۔ 3 ۳۔جِس میں حِکمَت اور عِلْم کےتمام خَزانے مَخفی ہَیں۔ 4 ۴۔ مَیں یہ اِس لیے کہتا ہُوں کہ کوئی تُمھیں چِکنی چُپڑِی باتوں سے گُمراہ نہ کر لے۔ 5 ۵۔کیونکہ مَیں رُوح کے اِعتِبار سےتو تُمھارے پاس ہُوں مگر جِسْم کے اِعتِبار سے دُور ، اَور تُمھارا نَظم و ضَبْط اورمسِیح پر تُمھارا پُختَہ اِیمان دیکھ کر خُوش ہُوں۔ 6 ۶۔جیسے تُم نے مسِیح کوقُبُول کِیا تھا اُس میں ویسے ہی چلو۔ 7 ۷۔ یَعنی اُس میں جَڑ پَکَڑتے، تَعمِیر ہوتے اورجیسے تُمھیں سِکھایا گیاتھااِیمان میں قائِم ہوتے چلے جاؤ۔اور شُکْر گُزارِی میں خُوب بڑھتےجاؤ ۔ 8 ۸۔ دیکھو کوئی تُمھیں اُس فَلسَفیہ اور لاحاصِل فریب سے گُمراہ نہ کر دے جو اِنسانی روایات اور دُنیا داری کی بُنیادی تعلِیمات کے مُطابِق ہَیں نہ کہ مسِیح کی تعلِیمات کے مُطابِق۔ 9 ۹۔کیُونکہ اِلُوہِیَت کی تمام معمُوری مسِیح میں مُجَسَّم ہو کر سُکُونت کرتی ہَے۔ 10 ۱۰۔تُم بھی اُس میں مَعمُور ہو گَئے ہو جوہر حُکمَران اور صاحبِ اِقتَدارپر حاکِم ہَے ۔ 11 ۱۱۔اور اُس میں تُمھارا وہ خَتنَہ نہیں ہُوا جِس میں ہاتھ سے بدَن کاٹا جاتا ہَے بلکہ وہ خَتنَہ ہُوا ہَے جو مسِیح میں ہوتا ہَے۔ 12 ۱۲۔تُم َبپتِسمہ کے ذریعےسے اُس میں دَفن ہُوئے اور اُسی میں تُم اُس اِیمان کے وسِیلے سے زِندَہ کیے گَئے ہو جوتُم خُداکی قُدرَت پر رکھتےہو۔ 13 ۱۳۔اور اُس نے تُمھیں بھی جو اپنی تَقصِیروں اورجِسمانی نامَختُونی کے سبَب سے مُردہ تھے اُسکے ساتھ زِندَہ کِیا اور ہمارِی سب تَقصِیر یں مُعاف کَردِیں۔ 14 ۱۴۔اور حُکموں کی وہ دستاویز جو ہم سے منصُوب اور ہمارے خِلاف تھی اُسے صلِیب پر کِیلوں سے جَڑ کر مِٹا ڈالا۔ 15 ۱۵۔ اُس نے حاکِموں اور اِختِیاروالوں سے ہتِھیار پھینکوا کر اُن کو سرِعام تماشا بنادِیا اور صلِیب کے ذریعے اُن پر فَتح کا شادِیانہ بجایا۔ 16 ۱۶۔ پس کوئی تُم کو کھانے پِینے اورعِید منانے سے مُتَعلِق اور نئے چاند اور سَبت کی بابَت مُجرِم نہ ٹھہرائے۔ 17 ۱۷۔ کیُونکہ یہ تو محض مُستَقبِل میں پیش آنے والی چِیزوں کاعکس ہَیں مگر حقِیقَت مسِیح ہی ہَے۔ 18 ۱۸۔ کوئی ظاہِری اِنکِساراور فرِشتوں کی پرَستِش کو پسَند کرکے تُمھیں دَوڑکے اِنعام سے مَحْرُوم نہ کر دے۔ایسا شَخْص جِسمانی عَقْل پر بےجا فَخْرکر کے ظاہِری چِیزوں میں مَصرُوف رہتا ہَے۔ 19 ۱۹۔ یُوں اُس نے مسِیح میں پَیوستہ رہنا چھوڑ دِیاحالانکہ وہ بدَن کا سَر ہَے۔وہی جوڑوں اور پَٹھّوں کے ذریعے پُورے بدَن کو سَہارا دے کر اُس کے مُختَلِف اَعضا کو جوڑ تا ہَے۔یُوں پُورا بدَن خُدا کی مدد سے ترقّی کرتا جاتاہَے ۔ 20 ۲۰۔جب تُم مسِیح کے ساتھ دُنیاداری کی اِبتدائی باتوں کے اِعتِبار سےمَرہی گَئے تو پِھر دُنیاداروں کی مانِند زِندگی کیُوں گُذارتے ہو اور اِنسانی احکام اور تَعلِیم کے مُرَوَّجہ اُصُولوں پر کیوں چلتے ہو۔ 21 ۲۱۔یَعنی یہ نہ چُھونا۔وہ نہ چکھنا۔اِسے ہاتھ نہ لگانا وغیرہ۔ 22 ۲۲۔ (کیونکہ یہ سب چِیزیں تو اِستِعمال ہوتے ہوتےختْم ہوجائیں گی)؟ 23 ۲۳۔اِن باتوں میں خُود ساختہ عِبادت اور اِنکساراور جِسمانی رِیاضت کے اِعتِبار سے حِکمَت دِکھتی تو ہَے لیکِن جِسمانی خواہِشات روکنے میں ذرا مُفِید نہیں۔
1 ۱۔ پس اگر تُم مسِیح کے ساتھ زِندہ کیے گَئے ہو تو عالمِ بالا کی چِیزوں کی تلاش میں رہو۔ جہاں مسِیح خُداکی دَہنی طرف بیٹھا ہَے۔ 2 ۲۔عالَمِ بالا کی چِیزوں کےخیال میں رہو نہ کہ زمِین کی۔ 3 ۳۔ کیونکہ تُم مَر چُکے ہو اور تُمھاری زِندگی مسِیح کے ساتھ خُدامیں مَخفی ہَے۔ 4 ۴۔ جب مسِیح جو ہماری زِندگی ہَے ظاہِر ہوگا تو تُم بھی اُس کے ساتھ جَلال میں ظاہِر ہو جاؤگے۔ 5 ۵۔چُنانچہ تُم دُنیَوی چِیزوں کو مار ڈالوجوتُم میں پائی جاتی ہَیں یَعنی زِناکاری، ناپاکی، شہوَت پَرستی،بَد خواہی اورلالچ جوایک طور سے بُت پَرستی ہی ہَے۔ 6 ۶۔ ایسی ہی باتوں کے سبَب سے نافرمانی کے فرزندوں پر خُدا کا غَضَب نازِل ہوگا۔ 7 ۷۔ایک زمانہ تھاکہ تُم بھی اِنہِی اعمال کے تحَت زِندگی گُزارتے تھےیَعنی جب تُمھاری زِندگی اِن اَعمال کے اِختِیار میں تھی۔ 8 ۸۔لیکِن اَب تُم یہ سب یَعنی غُصَّہ،غضَب،بدسلُوکی،بُہتان بازِی اورگالِیاں بَکنا ضرُور ترک کر دو۔ 9 ۹۔اَور بات چِیت کے دَوران ایک دُوسرے سےجُھوٹ مَت بولاکرو، کیُونکہ تُم نے اپنی پُرانی اِنسانِیَّت اُس کی حَرکَتوں سمیت اُتارپَھینکی ہَے۔ 10 ۱۰۔اور نئی اِنسا نیَّت اپنالی ہَے، یَعنی وہ اِنسانیَّت جِسے خُدائے خالِق، اپنی صُورَت پَر ڈھالتا جارہاہَے تاکہ تُم اُسکی پہچان میں ترَقّی کر تےجاؤ۔ 11 ۱۱۔نئی اِنسانیَّت اپنانے والوں میں نہ کوئی یُونانی رہا نہ یہَودی،نہ مَختُون رہا نہ نا مَختُون، نہ وحشی رہا نہ سُکُوتی، نہ غُلام رہا نہ آزاد بلکہ صِرف مسِیح ہی سب کُچھ ہَے اور سب میں ہَے۔ا 12 ۱۲۔چُنانچہ تُم خُداکے برَگُزِیدوں کے طور پر جو مُقَّدَس اورپیارے ہو! رَحَم دِلی، مہربانی، فِروتنی، شرافَت ،اور صَبْر کا لِباس زیب تَن کر لو۔ 13 ۱۳۔ایک دُوسرے کے لیے برداشت کا روَیّہ رکھّا کرواور اگرتُمھیں کِسی سےشِکواہ ہو تو اُسےاُسی طرح مُعاف کر دِیا کروجِس طرح خُداوَند نے تُمھیں مُعاف کِیا ہَے۔ 14 ۱۴۔اور اِن سب کے ساتھ ساتھ مُحَبَّت کو بھی پہن لو جو کامِلِیَّت کا کمر بَند ہَے۔ 15 ۱۵۔ اورمسِیؔح کا اِطمِینان جِس کے لیے تُم ایک بدَن ہو کر بُلائے بھی گَئے ہو تُمھارے دِلوں پر حُکُومَت کرے اورتُم شُکْر گُزاررہو۔ 16 ۱۶۔مسِیح کے کلام کو اپنے دِلوں میں کثَرت سے بَسنے دواور کمال حِکمَت سے آپس میں تَعلِیم دِیااور نَصِیحَت کِیاکرو اور شُکْرگُزار دِلوں کے ساتھ خُدا کی شان میں مَزامِیر اور گِیت اور رُوحانی غَزَلیں گایا کرو۔ 17 ۱۷۔ اور کلام یا کام جوبھی کرتےہو وہ سب خُداوَند یِسُوعؔ کے نام سے کِیا کرو اور اِسی کے سبَب سے خُدا باپ کا شُکْر بَجالایاکرو۔ 18 ۱۸۔اَے بِیویو! جیسا خُداوَندمیں مُناسِب ہَے اپنے شوہروں کے تابِع رہو۔ 19 ۱۹۔ اَے شوہَرو! اپنی ِبیویوں سے مُحَبَّت رکھو اور اُن سے تَلِخی سے پیش نہ آؤ۔ 20 ۲۰۔ اَے فرزندو! ہر ایک بات میں اپنےوالِدَین کے فرمان بردار رہو کیُونکہ یہ بات خُداوَند کو پسَند ہَے۔ 21 ۲۱۔اَے اولاد والو ! اپنی اولادکو مُشتَعِل نہ کرو تاکہ وہ دِل برداشتہ نہ ہو جائیں۔ 22 ۲۲۔ اَے نوکرو!جو جِسْم کے اِعتِبار سے تُمھارے مالِک ہَیں ہر بات میں اُن کے فرمان برداررہو۔لوگوں کو خُوش کرنے والوں کی طرح دِکھاوے کے لیے نہیں بلکہ نیک نیَّتِی اور خُدا کے خَوف سے۔ 23 ۲۳۔ جو کام کرو دِل سےکرو۔یہ جان کر کہ خُداوَند کے لیے کرتے ہو نہ کہ آدمِیوں کےلیے۔ 24 ۲۴۔ کیُونکہ تُم اِس بات سے واقِف ہو کہ تُمھیں اُس کے عِوَض خُداوَند کی طرف سے مِیراث مِلے گی۔ وہ مِیراث خُود مسِیح ہَے جِس کی تُم خِدمت کرتے ہو۔ 25 ۲۵۔کیُونکہ جو بُرائی کرتاہَے وہ اپنی بُرائی کی سَزا پائے گا۔وہاں کِسی کی طرف داری نہیں۔
1 ۱۔ اَے مالِکو!اپنے غُلاموں کواُن کاجائِز حَق دواور یہ جان رکھّو کہ آسمان پر تُمھارا بھی ایک مالِک ہَے۔ 2 ۲۔ دُعاکرنا جاری رکھّواور شُکْر گُزارِی کے ساتھ اُس میں بیدار رہو۔ 3 ۳۔اور ساتھ ساتھ ہمارے لیے بھی دُعاکِیا کرو کہ خُدا ہم پر کلام کا دروازہ کھولے تاکہ مَیں مسِیؔح کے اُس بھید کو بیان کر سکُوں جِس کے سبَب سے قَید ہُوں۔ 4 ۴۔ اوراُسے ایسابیان کرُوں جیسا مُجھ پر کرنا لازِم ہَے۔ 5 ۵۔ جواَب تک اِیمان نہیں لا پائے اُن کے ساتھ عَقْل سے پیش آؤاوراُن سے بات چِیت کا کوئی موقع ضائع نہ ہونے دو۔ 6 ۶۔تُمھاری بات چِیت ہمیشہ پُر فَضْل اور نمکِین ہو تاکہ تُمھیں ہر آدمی کو مُناسِب جواب دینا آ جائے۔ 7 ۷۔ عَزِیز بھائی اور دِیانَت دارخادِم تُخکُسؔ جو خُداوَند میں میراہم خِدمت ہَےمیرا سارا حال وہ تُمھیں بتادے گا۔ 8 ۸۔ اُسے مَیں نے تُمھاری طرف اِسی لیےروانہ کِیا ہَے کہ تُم ہمارے حال سے واقِف ہو جاؤ اوروہ تُمھارے دِلوں کو تسَلّی بھی دے گا۔ 9 ۹۔اور اُس کے ہمراہ اَنِیسمُؔس کو بھی روانہ کِیا ہَےجو دِیانَت دار اور تُم میں سے عزِیز بھائی ہَے۔یہ تُمھیں یہاں کی سب باتیں بتادیں گے۔ 10 ۱۰۔ارِستؔرخُس جومیرے ساتھ قَید میں ہَے تُمھیں سلام کہتا ہَے اور اِسی طرح مَرقُسؔ جو برنَباسؔ کارِشتہ میں بھائی ہَے۔(تُمھیں اُس کے بارے میں ہدایات دِی گَئیں ہَیں۔جب وہ تُمھارے پاس پُہنچےتو اُسے خُوش آمدِید کہنا۔) 11 ۱۱۔ یِسُوعؔ بھی جو یُوستُسؔ کہلاتا ہَے تُمھیں سلام کہتا ہَے۔میرے ہم خِدمتوں میں سے یہ تین مُختُون ہَیں جومیرے لیے تسَلّی کا باعِث رہے ہَیں۔ 12 ۱۲۔اِپفَراسؔ جو تُمھاری کلِیسِیامیں سے ہَے اور مسِیح یِسُوعؔ کا بَندہ ہَے تُمھیں سلام کہتا ہَے۔ وہ تُمھارے لیے ہمیشہ دُعاکرنے میں جانفِشانی کرتا ہَے تاکہ تُم کامِل ہو کر پُورے اِعْتِقاد کےساتھ خُدا کی پُورِی مرضی پر قائِم رہ سکو۔ 13 ۱۳۔ مَیں اُس کی گواہی دیتاہُوں کہ وہ تُمھاری،لودِیکِیہؔ کی اور ہِیراپُلُسؔ کی کلِیسِیا کے لیے بڑی محنَت کرتا ہَے۔ 14 ۱۴۔ پیارا طبِیب لُوقاؔ اور دِیماسؔ تُمھیں سلام کہتے ہَیں۔ 15 ۱۵۔ لَودِیکِیہؔ کے بھائِیوں اور نُمفاسؔ اور اُن کے گھر کی کلِیسِیا کو سلام کہنا۔ 16 ۱۶۔ اور جب تُم اِس خَط کو پڑھ لو تویُوں کرنا کہ لودِیکِیہؔ کی کلِیسِیا بھی اِس خَط کو پڑھے اور جو خَط لودِیکِیہؔ کی کلِیسِیاکو موصُول ہو وہ تُم میں بھی پڑھا جائے۔ 17 ۱۷۔ اور اَرخِپُّسؔ سے کہنا جو خِدمت خُداوَند میں تیرے سُپُرد کی گَئی ہَے تُواُسےدھیان سےسَر اَنْجام دے۔ 18 ۱۸۔ مَیں پَولُسؔ اپنے ہاتھ سے تُمھیں سلام لِکھتا ہُوں۔میری زَنجِیروں کو یاد رکھنا۔تُم پر فَضْل ہوتا رہے۔